Home

GOT-A900 Series User`s Manual (GT Works

1. 5 38400bps 19200bps gt ON gt ON 01 01 02 02 L 03 03 04 04 05 m 05 06 06 07 07 08 m 08 C 09 m 09 10 10 11 11 12 12 When the AJ71QC24N R2 is used and the transmission speed is set to 38400bps the GOT side transmission speed must be re set For details of the setting method refer to Section 6 2 2 A1SJ710C24 00000000 00000000 Mode switch Transmission specication R When setto When set SWIG 38400bps 19200bps When the A1SJ71QC24N R2 is used and the transmission speed is set to 38400bps the GOT side transmission speed must be re set For details of the setting method refer to Section 6 2 2 MPUTER LIN 5 COMPU K CONNECTION MELSEC GOT d When connecting to AJ71UC24 1 Mode switch Station number switch Transmission specification ON switch SW11 SW12 SW13 SW14 SW
2. MAX 3 units MAX 5 units There are various precautions for bus connection according to the system selected For details refer to Chapter 3 2 Direct connection to CPU Refer to Chapter 4 You can connect the GOT with the PLC CPU by an RS 422 RS 232C cable and pu is the most economical way of connection 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT 3 Computer link connection Refer to Chapter 5 Since the GOT can be connected with a computer link unit serial communication unit on a 1 1 or 1 2 QJ71C24 R2 function version B only basis multiple GOTs can be connected according to the number of computer link units serial communication units mounted to the PLC CPU Also while monitoring is performed on the GOT a sequence program can be debugged on the peripheral device e g GX Developer connected to the PLC CPU or serial communication unit QJ71C24 R2 function version B only 4 MELSECNET connection Refer to Chapter 6 Chapter 7 The GOT is used as a local station of the data link system or a normal station of the network system and allows remote control via network Bus type ih 5 CC Link connection ar to A 8 to Chapter 10 The GOT is used as an intelligent device station or a remote device
3. 21 11 21 11 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 2 Wiring diagram for use between connector terminal block conversion unit and user made original operation panel a For use of A6TBY36 E type connector terminal block conversion unit User made original operation panel XDO XD1 XD2 XD4 XD5 XD6 XD7 38 o0 39 o0 3A oo 3B o0 36 56 3D oo 3E 56 56 XSCN7 XSCN6 XSCN5 A6TBY36 E 08 1 UE 1 Load Load Load Load Load Lamp relay etc DC12 24V Load Load Load Load Load b For use of AGTBY54 E type connector terminal block conversion unit User made original operation panel XDO XD1 XD2 XD3 XD4 XD5 XD6 XD7 38 ess 3 O0 3 gts 3 um K O K O O K O 10 455 1 LO 6 1 K oo 08 50 6 0405 0 00 55 GOS 0255 A6TBY54 E Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load i e i l e e i i i i i Load Lamp relay etc DC12 24V 21 12 21 12 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 21 3 4 Recommended user prepared articles and how t
4. 4 8 4 3 3 Compatible RS 232C cable 4 11 5 1 System conflguratioris n x Rt eet i t epe t eerta de f ted tue 5 1 5 1 1 Connection with QCPU mode nennen nnne tnnt nnne 5 1 5 1 2 Connection with QCPU A Mode 5 2 5 1 3 Connection with QnACPU large 1 nennen 5 3 5 1 4 Connection with QnACPU 5 4 5 1 5 Connection with ACPU large type 5 5 5 1 6 Connection with ACPU small 5 6 5 2 Initial oe tanh ete eh ad oe eee 5 7 5 2 1 PLC CPU sIde Settlrigs i nee n e rn EE 5 7 5 222 settings elemen dine 5 15 5 3 Transmission specifications te NEMO eee 5 15 9 4 Connection Cable reete t Rd FUR A TRE eee eens ee 5 16 CHAPTER6 MELSECNET CONNECTION DATA LINK SYSTEM 6 1to6 2 6 1 System configuration ied e deed e doe 6 1 6 2 Switch setting of data link 6 2 c
5. RS 232C cable between TOOL port of PLC CPU and GOT 1 RS 232C cable between COM port of PLC CPU and GOT 1 RS 232C cable between link interface unit and GOT 1 1 The RS 232C cable can be user fabricated Refer to Section 19 3 for details of the fabricating method User fabricated cable 2 AFC85853 3m 19 7 19 7 19 MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC WORKS PLC MELSEC GOT 19 1 8 Connection with FP M C20TC or FP M C32TC 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the FP M C20TC or FP M C32TC The numbers 1 to 3 given in the system configuration denote the numbers 1 to 3 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications o Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance Connected to TOOL port 2 RS 232C cable Within 3m Max 3m RS 232C cable Within 15m Max 15m 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the FP M C20TC or FP M C32TC Type Image Application ee GOT unit Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T Matsushita Electric Work A9GT 50WRS2 PLC connected GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface RS 232
6. 21 7 Connection to video 21 23 HITACHIUPLGC ice 18 5 Matsushita Electric Works PLC 19 11 Microcomputer connection 20 2 Omron PLC connection 12 15 Sharp PLC connection 15 4 SIEMENS PLC connection 17 3 Toshiba PLC 16 2 Yaskawa PLC 13 6 Connection to bar code 1 4 Connection to external I O equipment 1 4 Connection to personal 1 5 Connection to printer 1 5 Connection to video 1 5 Connection to servo amplifiers 1 6 D Direct connection to 1 1 E Extension number switch 3 19 Ethernet connection 1 3 l WO slot switch eseesseeeeeeeee 3 19 M MELSECNET connection 1 2 Microcomputer connection 1 3 P PC card installation 1 5 PLC CPU that allows monitoring 2 1 Q QBUS SLOT 3 17 QBUS STAG
7. When the A1SJ71QC24N is used and the transmission speed is set to 38400bps the GOT side transmission speed must be re set For details of the setting method refer to Section 5 2 2 5 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION MELSEC GOT d When connecting to AJ71C24 S8 Transmission Station number Switch specification switch ii Mode switch Station number switch Mode switch Transmission specification switch E Q A SW11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 sweat 23 24 eee as i 5 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION MELSEC GOT f When connecting to A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1SJ71C24 R4 Transmission specification Y switch Ne 01 m 02 03 Cm 04 m ON 05 C 06 m 07 m 08 09 10 Cm 11 m 12 m Station number switch Mode switch 5 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 5 2 2 GOT side settings When the GOT is connected with the computer link module or serial communication module for monitoring the GOT side settings need not be made basically However when you use the AJ71QC24N R4 R2 or A1SJ71QC24N R2 and want to make data transmission of 38400bps the GOT sid
8. 18 1 18 1 1 Connection with large 18 1 18 1 2 Connection with 200 to 252 series series board type or EH 150 series 18 2 18 2 Initial settirigs iei e eie ete ee b eee ee sete e uev pe dan oue 18 3 18 2 1 PLC Side settings eiit re etre HP ee E He e ed pod Pe edebat 18 3 18 2 2 GOT side settings nin ieee e cda n HR dened He ce Ld ede Ee e dened nied need 18 4 18 3 Connection cable ed ee ed rt e E e d o E a d aU a ene 18 5 18 3 1 RS 422 cable e het de t ey ta ghe eoo aUe eee eagle ea E a e 18 5 18 9 2 RS 292C cable i iat emptus ep idend E p dedu i iens 18 6 19 1 System configurations osetia eee eue tuned ede 19 1 19 1 1 Connection with FPO C16CT or FPO C32CT sssssssseseseeeeene nene 19 1 19 1 2 Connection with FP1 C24C or FP1 C40C nennen nnns 19 2 19 1 8 Connectlon with ERZ onem etr eed etes ede eta edam 19 3 19 1 4 Connection with 4 nennen nenne ntn tnnt innen entr 19 4 19 1 5 Connection with E P5 de Rn ed ep nda ads 19 5 19 1 6 Connection with 10 teen tnnt tentent 19 6 19 1 Connection with EPTOSE eai en Rete ei e emet eni a ee etai rein 19 7 19 1 8 Connection with FP M C20TC or 2
9. 19 8 SAEI e M 19 9 19 2 1 PEG CPU side Settlngs ii ee bei IRE 19 9 19 2 2 GOT side SCuinGS a nene e alias ORE ND HR eee NOR 19 10 19 3 Connection cables a a a a aa a a a a aaa a e a eaa e ea aaeain 19 11 20 1 System config ratlori 21 crece ED ee Ee eoe te cent 20 1 20 2 Connecting cable 3 22 f So tee f ee ee f e e e end 20 2 20 2 1 With connection to nnn 20 2 20 2 2 Without connection to 1 enne rennen etre nnne nennen nennt nnns 20 4 20 3 Transmission sp cification ssie iter tret te tbe tein Fe e e eL e o ua e de uae Puede duo 20 5 VUEMBTUCEICE CIC 20 6 20 5 Communication commands sss eene 20 7 20 5 1 Commiand list 5 oe Alas er eet e vr eU a eapite y 20 7 20 5 2 Data communication 1 niaaa 20 8 20 5 3 Precautions for use ioo int deat e ets 20 10 20 5 4 Batch read command aare 20 11 20 5 5 Batch write command nennen 20 12 20 5 6 Random read command RR 20 13 20 5 7 Random write command RW nennen nnne nnne nnne nnne nnne 20 14 CHAPTER21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION 21 1 to 21 25 21
10. External I O unit side conversion unit side Pin Number Signal Name Shield Pin Signal Name B4 XDO 20 XDO A4 XD1 A20 XDI B3 XD2 B19 XD2 A3 XD3 A19 XD3 B2 XD4 B18 XD4 A2 XD5 A18 XD5 B1 17 XD6 Ai XD7 17 XD7 B8 XSCNO B16 XSCNO A8 XSCN1 16 XSCN1 B7 XSCN2 B XSCN2 A7 XSCN3 15 XSCN3 B6 XSCNA4 14 XSCN4 XSCN5 A14 XSCN5 5 XSCN6 B XSCN6 A5 XSCN7 A13 XSCN7 B16 YDO B12 YDO A16 YDI PAA ALB YDI B15 YD2 BN YD2 A15 YD3 YD3 B14 YD4 B10 YD4 A14 YD5 A10 YD5 B13 YD6 B9 YD6 A13 YD7 A9 YD7 B12 YD8 B8 YD8 A12 YD9 A8 YD9 11 YD10 B7 YD10 11 Y A7 YD11 B10 YD12 B6 YD12 A10 YD13 A6 YD13 B9 B5 YD14 A9 YD15 A5 YD15 A17 DC1i2 24V B4 DC12 24V B17 DC12 24V c A4 DAZA A18 DC12 24V B3 DC12 24V B18 ov A3 ov 19 ov B2 ov B19 Vacant A2 Vacant A20 Vacant B1 Vacant B20 FG Al Vacant 21 8 21 8 2 1 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT Connectors and connector covers used 1 2 4 3 1 2 Connector with cover A6CON1 Mitsubishi Electric Connector FCN 361J040 AU Connector cover FCN 360C040 B Pair shielded cable UL 2464 AWG26 or equivalent FG wire UL 1015 AWG14 or equivalent Fujitsu c Precaution for cable fabrication The cable fabricated should be within 10m long 21 9 21 9 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNE
11. Mating device on Ethernet Microcomputer connection gt RS 232C RS 422 serial communication board EOP A9GT RS2 T A9GT RS4 PLC Microcomputer board Third party PLC connection RS 232C RS 422 serial communication board c A9GT RS2 T FA AO9GT RS4 Third party PLC Omron PLC Refer to Chapter 12 Toshiba PLC Refer to Chapter 16 Yaskawa PLC Refer to Chapter 13 SIEMENS PLC Refer to Chapter 17 Allen Bradley PLC Refer to Chapter 14 Hitachi PLC Refer to Chapter 18 Sharp PLC Refer to Chapter 15 Matsushita PLC Refer to Chapter 19 1 OVERVIEW A956WGOT MELSEC GOT 2 A956WGOT Bus connection Refer to Chapter lt Sv Bus connection interface board Sun A9GT 50WQBUSS Bus connection meu 0 E A9GT QBUSS2U E Bus connection interface board 4 9 A9GT 50WBUSS eR QCPU Q mode QnACPU ACPU Bus connection interface unit large small A9GT BUSSU A9GT BUS2SU A7GT BUSSU A7GT BUS2SU CPU direct connection Refer to Chapter 4 es _ RS 232C serial communication board QCPU Q A mode lt A9GT 50WRS2 FXCPU Sw 5 422 serial communication board 2 3 A9GT 50WRS4 large small Computer link connection Refer to Chapter 5 Los RS 232C serial communication board M QCPU Q mode
12. When cover is open 5 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 2 When RS 422 communication is made on GOT a When connecting to QU71C24 Switch setting for the module is not required Monitoring is available without making switch setting in the assignment setting of GX Developer The following settings are also available for monitoring according to the CH interface of the module to be connected with GOT For the operation method of GX Developer refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual Channel Where GOT Is Settings Connected Switch setting for 1 0 and intelligent functional module Input format se Type Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 SD Cian EUST L 1 00 QJ7z1C24 R2 0000 ZS a ae ee 21 21 Switch setting for 1 0 and intelligent functional module Input format HEX Slot Tye Modelname Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 E a 1 0471624692 1 000 000 See Bt When using the GOT connected to the serial communication unit of function version you can use CH1 and 2 of the serial communication unit together Hence you can use th
13. c Numerical display function Form Number 021 unsigned BIN 16 bit Unsigned 16 bit d Touch key function Action Switched to Device Data format Operation type Predva i T om e e 2 Any Any woa ma SignedBIN Fixed value 01 9 Ay Ay owo Bar Fixedvauet 5 Any Any _ Word D3 Signed BIN Fixed value 255 Lamp indication function Case bit Number 7 ALON At OFF D22 B0 bit App 2 App 2 APPENDICES MELSEC GOT Appendix 1 3 Host side sample program The host side sample program C language is contained in GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 The sample program is installed when GT Designer is installed Appendix 1 4 System operation overview System operations will be explained in relation to the host side processing GOT side display processing and data communication packets Packet used for data GOT side display processing Processing item Host side processing details yao communication details Port open processing is performed Port open processing is performed Screen 1 switchin 1 is written to screen switching device D20 batch write packet _ Base screen 1 is displayed Reply from GOT is received Initial processing Judgment is made as to whether reply from GOT is in error or not Numerical display 0 is shown in numerical Initial value is written to de
14. 6 6m gt l 4 36 6m re First GOT within 6 6m 4 Connection cable 7 Connection cable Max 6 6m M Max 36 6m 3 Bus connector conversion box LY First GOT Ern 6 6m 6 Connection cable 5 Connection cable 6 6m gt la Max 30m Max 36 6m LZ 2777 E EE E Fist cot px 3 GOTs within 6 6m 4 Connection cable 7 Connection cable 7 Connection cable 6 6m 1 30 36 6m 1 Also includes the extension cable length between base unit and base unit when the extension base unit is used 3 8 3 8 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the QnACPU large type or ACPU large type Type Application Bus connection Bus connection GOT unit board 1 2 unit 1 2 A9GT BUSS A9GT BUSSU A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT BUS2S A9GT BUS2SU A9GT BUSSU A956WGOT A9GT 50WBUSS A9GT BUS2SU Bus connected GOT at A9GT BUSSU termination A9GT BUS2SU A956GOT ATGT BUSS A7GT BUS2S A951GOT with built in communication interface A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT BUS2S A9GT BUS2SU A956WGOT A9GT BUS2SU A9GT BUS2SU A956GOT A7GT BUS2S Unit for conversion of connection cable connectors and also for extension of distance between
15. Max 15m RS 422 cable Within 200m Max 200m 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 CPU01 CVM1 CPU11 or CVM1 CPU21 Applicati Type mage ication 9 GOT unit Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT 2 A9GT RS2T Omron PLC connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 232C communication GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT _ A9GT RS4 Omron PLC connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRSA4 422 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface RS 232C cable between CPU and GOT Refer to Section 12 3 and fabricate on user side RS 422 cable between CPU and GOT 12 7 12 7 12 OMRON PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 12 1 7 Connection with CS1 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the CS1 The numbers 1 to 9 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 1 to 9 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions System Configuration connected distance 6 RS 232C cable Max 15m 3 Communication unit 7 RS 232C cabl
16. 3 Bus connector S CE conversion box Within 33m 5 Connection cable Max 33m d First GOT within 3m onnection cable 8 Connection cable Max 3m Max 33m First GOT more than 3m 5 Connection cable 30 L Z VY E E E m C k First GOT i 3 GOTs pe within 3m 7 Connection cable 8 Connection cable 8 Connection cable Max 3m le Max 33m gt 1 Also includes the extension cable length between base unit and base unit when the extension base unit is used 3 16 3 16 3 BUS CONNECTION 2 System equipment MELSEC GOT The following table indicates the system equipment needed for motion controller CPU A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU S3 Type Bus connection board 1 2 A9GT BUSS A9GT BUS2S A9GT 50WBUSS Applicati in GOT unit A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT Bus connection unit 1 2 A9GT BUSSU A9GT BUS2SU A9GT BUSSU A9GT BUS2SU A9GT BUSSU A9GT BUS2SU ATGT BUSS A7GT BUS2S A9GT BUS2S A9GT BUS2SU A9GT BUS2SU A9GT BUS2SU A7GT BUS2S Bus connected GOT at termination with built in communication interface A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A956WGOT Bus connected GOT at midpoint Unit for conversion of connection cable connectors and also for extension of distance between GOT and base unit Connection cable between base unit and GOT when only one GOT is connected 9 5 6 Connection cable
17. RX7FF to RX7FO 1 Store data into the remote inputs RX of the GOT Touch switch function etc 2 Data is stored by link scan into the remote inputs RX assigned to the GOT of the Master station Collected per link scan OPERATION DIRECTIVE 3 Read the data of the remote inputs RX to the PLC CPU MELSEC A870G0T MITSUBISHI The GOT can enter data touch switch function etc into the remote inputs RX assigned to the GOT of the Master station Though the GOT cannot enter data touch switch function etc into the other remote inputs RX it can display data lamp display function etc 8 CC LINK CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT Remote outputs Display function area of the GOT GOT A8GT J61BT13 GOT A8GT J61BT13 Station 1 1 station occupied Station 2 4 stations occupied PLC CPU Master station Intelligent device station Intelligent device station Remote output RY RYOF to RY1F to RY10 RY2F to RY20 RY3F to RY30 RY4F to RY40 RY5F to RY50 RY6F to RY60 RY7F to RY70 RY8F to RY80 RY9F to RY90 RYAF to RYAO RYAF to RYAO to RY7FF to RY7FO RY7FF to RY7FO 1 Store data into the remote outputs RY assigned to the Master station by CC Link parameter setting 2 Data is stored into the remote outputs of the GOT by link scan
18. 15 3 15 1 4 Connection with JW 70CUH or JW 100CUH ssssseseseeneeneenenenenneeneee nennen nnne 15 4 15 2 Seting E T A A E peevinengeestealgeanseetye 15 5 15 2 1 Connecting directly to the PLC CPU a i a 15 5 15 2 2 Connecting to the link Unit ee ee eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeesaeesaeeeaeesaeesaeeeaeesaeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeas 15 6 15 3 Connection cable 1 21 al dn on e en Hi cn e ed 15 7 15 3 1 652422 rahle aa a A AN e UH ER TRUE ia RE Erg TEES 15 7 15 3 2 RS 232C6 e ee eaa e rere ep ree e e ree s Pega 15 9 16 1 System contiguration et re ne d pe Le d e dete dee te e a re 16 1 16 2 Initial att Bu tels 16 2 16 2 1 Switch settings of the T2 series T2 PU224 T2E 2 16 2 16 2 2 PEG side Settings on to i ETE ERU ERREUR 16 2 16 3 Gonnectionicable 15 5 T uae etu 16 3 16 3 1 RS3422 Cable cess se EP e e eR e ERE eni Hd 16 3 16 3 2 RS 292G Cable innate aun il iniit iata bL 16 5 TA SYSTEM CONNGUFATION 2 nie at ree e ee ate eat 17 1 T6 2 Initial Settings cet t 17 2 VES CONMECHON cable itte ted tie EL die I d Mesi bab dL eta 17 3 18 HITACHI PLC CONNECTION 18 110 18 7 18 1 System configurations
19. 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the CP 9200SH Applicati Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 2 Yaskawa PLC connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 232C communication GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface RO EE A97 GOT A960GOT es RS4 Yaskawa PLC connected RS lagseWGOT IASGT SOWRS4 ss 50WRS4 422 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface Memo bus unit RS 232C cable between memo bus unit and GOT Refer to Section 13 3 and fabricate on user side 13 3 13 3 13 YASKAWA PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 13 1 4 Connection with MP 920 MP 930 CP 9300MS CP 9200 H or PROGIC 8 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configuration and connection conditions assume connection with the MP 920 MP 930 CP 9300MS CP 9200 H or PROGIC 8 The numbers 1 to 2 given in the system configurations denote the numbers to 2 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance Changes with the connection 2 RS 232C cable target CPU specifications 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment ne
20. O Accessible X Not accessible POINT For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter make sure to use the local device number if designating devices allocated to other station If not display speed will be reduced Station to be Network No 1 Network No 2 accessed Gd Station Anu 1 1 29 Ana cts anuas QnAQ 1 AnU 22 AnN 23 Anu 2 4 connected to GOT 1 2 AnU 1 1 O Loca 0 Other 3 0 Other 4 0 Other 4 Q Q Mode i 1 Other 1 sspe 1 Other 4 2 Other 1 2 Other eee 2oter4 Designating NW number and station number for setting monitor device 1 Monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter at the connected station local station NW number 0 Station number Local 2 When monitoring other stations other than B and W other network o omero i QnA e 1 Other 1 1 Other 2 1 Other 4 0 Local 2 Other 2 2 Other 3 2 Other 4 AnN 23 EE EET T REESE AnU 24 ae _ _ i Soome o oroa How to read the 2 Other 2 table m Other 2 7 7 NW number Station number 2 SPECIFICATION MELSEC GOT Example 4 When using CPU direct connection or computer link connection Control station Control station e Monitor access range of other station devices other than
21. c Link unit JW 21CM JW 10CM ZW 10CM Sharp GOT D sub 15 pin male metric D sub 25 pin male metric Cable connection and direction of signal Screw type Screw type Signal name SDB 5 SHIELD SHIELD 21 SO shield 2 Connector and connector cover to be used GOT connector Connector with cover 17JE 23250 02 D8A6 DDK Connector at Sharp PLC Use the connector matching the Sharp PLC 3 Precautions for preparation of connector The maximum cable length may vary depending on the specification of the Sharp PLC specification For details refer to the Sharp PLC operation manual 15 8 15 8 15 SHARP PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 15 3 2 RS 232C cable The RS 232C cable connection diagram and the connector for the PLC CPU and the GOT are as follows 1 Connection diagram a PLC CPU JW 22CU JW 70CUH JW 100CUH Sharp GOT D sub 15 pin male metric n D sub 9 pin female inch Cable connection and direction of signal screw type Screw type Pin No Signal name CD RD RXD SD TXD DTR ER DSR DR RS RTS CS CTS GOT D sub 15 pin male metric D sub 9 pin female inch screw type screw type Pin No RSRTS 8 O EP m ll j 2 Connector and connector cover to be used GOT connector HDEB 9S 05 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD HDE CTH1 4 40 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD Connector for Sharp PLC
22. 2 Connector and connector cover GOT connector Description Model Manfacuer HDEB 9S 05 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD HDE CTH1 4 40 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD Function extension board connector Use the connector compatible with the function extension board 3 Precautions for cable preparation The cable must be 15 m 49 21 feet or shorter 4 CPU DIRECT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 4 3 About transparent function 2 port interface function When the GOT is connected directly with the Q QnA A FX motion controller CPU connecting a peripheral device such as a personal computer allows you to read write and monitor the sequence programs of the CPU RS 232C RS 422 cable Sequence programs can be read written 1 When using the transparent function you cannot use the barcode function 2 When the PLC CPU is monitored by a peripheral device such as a personal computer the display speed of the GOT decreases 4 3 1 About software used The software programs usable change with the CPU connected to the GOT Refer to the following table and use the software programs compatible with the connected CPU Connected PLC CPU Usable software QCPU Q mode SWOD5C GPPW E SWLID5F GPPW E SWOD5C GPPW E SWEIDSF GPPW E SWEIIVD GPPQ SWLIIWC MEDOC E SWEID5C GPPW E SWEIDSF GPPW E SWEIIVD GPPA QCPU A mode ACPU gt SWLID5C GPPW E SWEIDSF GPPW E SWEIPC FXGP WIN SWLIIWC MEDOC E DOS version SW2SRX GSV1
23. SELECT CHANGE ee the transmission speed 4800 9600 19200 38400 19200 START UP TIME Set how many seconds after GOT power on the communication with the PLC GL series CPU will be started Other thanGL series 1 h iting time f hen th Th i f he PLC CP SEND MESSAGE DELAY Set e waiting time from when the GOT has received data from the PLC CPU until it sends next data to the PLC CPU The utility function can be started by switching power on again after installing the system programs system OS communication driver etc into the GOT After the utility function has started touch the Setup icon to display the setup screen and make settings related to Yaskawa PLC connection 13 YASKAWA PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 13 3 Connection cable 13 3 1 RS 422 cable 1 Connection diagram a When using GL60S GL60H GL70H GL120 or GL130 Yaskawa PLC GOT D sub 9 pin male D sub 25 pin male metric screw type Cable connection and direction of signal metric screw type Yaskawa PLC GOT 14 pins D sub 25 pin male metric screw type 13 7 13 7 13 YASKAWA PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 2 Connector and connector cover Connector for GOT Connector with cover 17JE 23250 02 D8A6 DDK Connector for Yaskawa PLC Use a connector matching the memo bus unit 3 Precautions for cable preparation Maximum cable length depends on the specifications of the memo bus unit For fu
24. 2 Send packet structure of numerical display batch write packet is indicated Stored value 0x02 0x57 0x44 0x30 0x30 0x32 0x31 0x30 0x31 0x03 Contents wo pei tpi TT 8 Send packet structure of numerical display batch read packet is indicated Contents mv Da tpom o 4 Receive packet structure of batch write reply packet is indicated When normal When error occurs Contents prem rss 5 Receive packet structure of batch read reply packet is indicated When normal When error occurs Sumcheck STX Stored value 2 Contents 6 Receive packet structure of interrupt receive packet is indicated Storedvaiue Interrupt data App 4 App 4 INDEX A About transparent function 4 8 Access range for monitoring 2 3 Applicable CPU 2 1 Bus connection naa 1 1 C CC Link connection 1 2 Computer link connection 1 2 Connection Allen Bradley PLC connection 14 1 Bus connection 3 1 CC Link connection intelligent device station 8 1 CC Link connection remote device station 9 1 CC Link co
25. Network No confirmation Confirms the network number group number and station Network No confirmation number designated for the network Station No confirmation 8 CC LINK CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT Chapter 8 CC Link connection intelligent device station 8 1 System configuration 1 System configuration and connection conditions The following system configuration and connection conditions assume CC Link connection intelligent device station with the PLC CPU The numbers 1 to 3 given in the system configuration denote the numbers 1 to 3 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance a 2 CC Link system master local unit 26 GOTs Within 1200m 3 CC Link dedicated cable 3 Max Longest HT i h AR 5 1200 gt 1 The number of connected GOTs varies with the configuration of the CC Link system and the installation distance maximum transmission distance varies with the transmission speed of the CC Link system For details refer to the CC Link System Master Local Unit User s Manual Details 2 On the CC Link system the GOT is handled as a slave station as described below Description CC Link station type Intelligent device station Number of occupied stations 1 station 4 st
26. No Object Function to Be Set Setting Lamp display function Monitor device M200 Settings made to display on the GOT the Lamp display function Monitor device M201 values stored in M200 M201 Numerical input function Write device D300 Settings made to store the values entered with Numerical input function Write device 0301 the numerical input function into D300 D301 5 Touch key function Bit ALT M202 Settings made to store the ON OFF By Renee Bit ALT M204 information entered with the touch key icr function into M200 M201 7 Touch key function Screen switching device Fixed at 1 Setting made to switch to base screen No 1 8 Touch key function Screen switching device Fixed at 2 Setting made to switch to base screen No 2 9 Touch key function Screen switching device Fixed at 3 Setting made to switch to base screen No 3 8 CC LINK CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 8 3 4 A8GT J61BT13 switch setting example The following is an example of setting the A8GT J61BT 13 switches Switch Name Online data link enabled and with automatic mode setting switch return Station number 0 Station No 1 setting switches 1 Transmission baudrate 156 5 setting switch Condition setting Input data state of data link error station Clear switches Number of occupied stations 1 station 8 3 5 Parameter setting example setting using GX Developer In the network
27. to 5 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 6 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance 3 Base mount type upper link unit Within 15m 5 RS 232C cable E D Max 15m 1 GOT 4 Base mount type upper link unit sic 6 RS 422 cable Within 200m Max 200m 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the C200H series Applicati ication 9 GOT unit Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT _ A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T Omron PLC connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 232C communication A953GOT with built in communication interface OmronPLC connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS4 422 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface 3 mount type upper link unit C200H LK201 V1 Base mount type upper link unit C200H LK202 V1 RS 232C cable between upper link unit and GOT Refer to Section 12 3 and fabricate on user side RS 422 cable between upper link unit and GOT 12 1 12 1 12 OMRON PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 12 1 2 Connection with C200
28. 1 4 romeo QnA 2 1 1 Other 1 1 Other 2 1 Other 4 0 Local 2 Other 2 2 Other 3 2 Other 4 Ima ff de AnU 2 4 104 __ 2 Other 2 0 Local_ How to read the 2 Other 2 table Other 2 T jh NW number Station number Example 2 When using bus connection Control station Control station Data link system Monitor access range of other station devices other than B and W other network Station to be Network No 1 Network No 2 Data link Station accessed connected to GOT i b 1 2 i i 2 1 n p 2 3 2 4 p co L2 Leg ees bets Tx O mea x fora 1 3 QnA 2 2 O Local O Local O Local M x x otoa Eo ae ox ee ox Jeu ox qn poris Accessible Accessible within the range for T C 0 to 255 R ER ZR cannot be monitored X Not accessible 2 9 2 9 2 SPECIFICATION MELSEC GOT POINT For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter make sure to use the local device number if designating devices allocated to other station If not display speed will be reduced Station to be Network No 1 Network No 2 Data link system accessed Designating NW number and station number for setting monitor device 1 When monitoring devices B and W that are allocated
29. 11 11 11 11 11 ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 2 Network parameter setting Setting with GX Developer Parameter setting can be made from the MELSECNET ETHERNET network parameter setting screen Set the network type first No network No group No station number mode and operation setting Item Setting Screen Examples Module 1 Module 2 Network type Ethemet Ethernet Starting 1 0 No Network No Total stations Group No Station No Mode On line On line Ethernet Parameters Operational settings Operational settings Ethernet operations r Communication data p Initial Timing Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time C ASCII code lc Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time r IP address Operation Setting DEC IP address Enable Write at RUN time End Cancel Operation settings To make communications with GX Developer ask the person in charge of the network about the IP address setting to confirm and set the IP address Since any values may be set to the other items set them according to the specifications of the other node and application connected to the Q series compatible E71 The following are the operation setting items that may be set to any values on GX Developer 1 Communication data code Either Binary code or ASCII code may be specifi
30. E 5 Connection cable Max 37m 1 Also includes the extension cable length between base unit and base unit when the extension base unit is used 2 When not using the extension base unit Fit it to the main base unit When using the extension base unit Fit it to the extension base unit on the last stage 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance First GOT within 13 2m 4 Connection cable 5 Connection cable 5 Connection cable 13 2m M Max 37m gt l 2 to 5 GOTs 3 Bus To use the bus extension connector box extension fit it to the extension connector of the base unit connector T7 Plug the connection cable into f the bus extension connector box First GOT LD EE EE more than i 13 2 illi ini Connection cable 5 cable 5 Connection cable Max 37m 1 Also includes the extension cable length between base unit and base unit when the extension base unit is used 2 When not using the extension base unit Fit it to the main base unit When using the extension base unit Fit it to the extension base unit on the last stage 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the QCPU Q mode Type Image Application i g pp GOT unit Bus connection Bus connection boa
31. K4M48 K1 Remote input RX read Refer to 1 Error status flag Command M58 MOV H0803 D100 MOV D101 Command data storage MOV Hoocs D102 MOV H012C D103 Transfers master station TO HO H1E0 0100 K4 RWWwO to 3 FSET M148 GOT request flag ON command execution GOT complete flag M48 ON processing complete RST M148 Always write command MOV H1234 D104 Mov HoEs4 D105 H gt write data storage MOV Ho066 0106 Transfers master station ro meoo uwwoto2 SET M150 H GOT always write flag ON 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT Always ON TO HO H163 K4M148 1 H Remote output RY write 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 9 3 Sequence Program Example 9 3 1 Sequence Program Example When Monitoring Using the Normal Monitor Method The following system example is used to describe the sequence program in this section Refer to the CC Link Master Module User s Manual regarding the sequence program for the entire CC Link system 1 System configuration of the program example Station No 11 station Number of stations occupied 2 station setting 2 Relationship among the PLC CPU master station buffer memory and remote device stations GOT mee er
32. SEND MESSAGE WAIT 000 xi0ms 0 300 SEND MESSAGE TIME 03 sec 390 START UP TIME 0 0 3 0 255 Page 2 2 T lt SELECT CHANGE 11 10 11 ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 11 2 3 When using Q Series Compatible E71 For communication from GX Developer via the Q compatible E71 there are the following setting items and precautions The explanations in this section will be made for the following system configuration Q Series Compatible E71 GT SoftGOT gt N WNo 1 1 21 PC No 3 IP address 192 168 0 3 Port 5001 No 5001 Set as host IP address 192 168 0 1 lt Q Series Compatible E71 gt N WNo 1 PC No i2 IP address 192 168 0 2 No 5001 Refer to item 4 in this section for how to set up the Ethernet unit network number of GOT personal computer number IP address and port number When connecting multiple GOTs in the Ethernet network set different PLC No for each GOT Refer to Section 11 2 6 Procedure for and restrictions on communications via Q compatible E71 Restrictions a Communications cannot be made via the MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET B MELSECNET lI b The communication is disabled when remote password is set for the Q series E71 The system alarm 402 Communication timeout is displayed 1 Compatible models QJ71E71 QJ71E71 B2 QJ71E71 100
33. The utility function can be started by switching power on again after installing the system programs system operating system communication driver etc into the GOT After starting touch the Setup icon to show the setup screen and make settings related to bus connection In the system configuration which uses the the same STAGE No as that of the GOT must be set to the ASGT QCNB For details of the setting method refer to the ASGT QCNB Bus Extension Connector Box User s Manual When using the QA1S6 B extension base unit connect the GOT after the extension base unit in terms of hardware but assign the I O number after the Q B base unit Example When 16 point modules are loaded to all slots in the following configuration STAGE No number Q38B main base unit 00 to 7F Q68B extension base unit 1 80 to FF QA1S68B extension base unit 3 1A0 to 21F 2 100 to 19F For bus connection with the Q00JCPU the number of extension base units including the GOT must be within two For bus connection with the QOOCPU or Q01CPU the number of extension base units including the GOT must be within four GX Developer has the system monitor function which batch monitors the status of the PLC system Note that there are the following restrictions on monitoring the module detail information of the GOT lt Screen display example for GX Developer system monitor function gt Module
34. 0to7 Setthe empty I O slot number 8 9 Must not be used Factory set to 0 POINT You cannot assign the GOT to the empty I O slot on the main base Therefore even in a system which does not use the extension base always allocate the GOT to a vacant I O slot on the extension base slot having the vacant points within the maximum points of the PLC CPU with the exception of those of the standard base 3 BUS CONNECTION Setting examples MELSEC GOT 1 Setting method used when there is no extension base unit connected Since the GOT cannot be assigned to an empty slot on the main base make setting to assign it to the empty slot of the first extension if there is no extension base unit connected 1 Connection of one GOT Extension No switch 1 slot switch 0 2 Connection of two GOTs Extension No switch 1 slot switch 0 Extension No switch 1 slot switch 1 3 Connection of three GOTs Extension No switch 1 slot switch 0 Extension No switch 1 slot switch 1 Extension No switch 1 slot switch 2 2 Setting method used for assignment of GOT s to empty slot s of extension base unit Set the extension number s and slot number s of the empty slot s to be assigned to Note that the following setting examples ass
35. 1 Connection of one GOT 2 Connection of two GOTs 3 Connection of three GOTs o o C P U Extension No switch 2 Extension No switch 2 Extension No switch 2 slot switch 0 slot switch 0 slot switch 0 32 vacant points of the PLC CPU are required Extension No switch 2 Extension No switch 2 When using small CPU GOT Connect the bus connection slot switch 1 slot switch 1 cable to the vacant extension connector the standard base 64 vacant I O points of the PLC CPU are required Extension No switch 2 slot switch 2 GOT 96 vacant I O points of the PLC CPU are required When using the Q3ACPU Q4A R CPU A30 CPU A4UCPU or A0J2HCPU the above setting cannot be made Empty I O slots are always needed on the extension base unit Also when using the A0J2HCPU assign the GOT s to I O slot s 0 to of the first extension 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 3 4 Troubleshooting for disabled monitoring The following is the troubleshooting method when the GOT is d
36. 1 Connection to a remote NEM station cannot of mm connection L 2 Including the case where the MELSECNET H is used in the NET 10 mode Connection to a remote network cannot be made 3 For connection as a remote device station only the link devices RX RY RWw RWr assigned to the GOT may be monitored 4 When creating a monitor screen project data with the GT Designer note the following two points When setting the monitor devices note that the device ranges that can be monitored are the ranges for monitoring the ACPU A3ACPU equivalent The PLC CPUs monitored are the QCPU mode and QnACPU but the PLC type must be set to MELSEC A 5 The A2CCPU and A2CCPUC2A do not allow bus connection 6 When monitoring the ANNCPU S1 A2SCPU S1 A0J2HCPU or A2CCPU data with word specification Word specification for word bit device cannot be written from the GOT to the CPU with software version earlier than the gt following AnNCPU S1 Version L or later for the one with link version H or later for the one without link A2SCPU S1 Version or later AOJ2HCPU Version E or later A2CCPU Version or later 7 The A2CCPU does not allow computer link connection 8 For computer link connection of the A2SCPU A2SHCPU S1 A2SHCPU A1SHCPU A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A171SHCPU and A172SHCPU use the computer link module whose software version is version U or later In addition the A0J2 C214 S1 A0J2HCPU
37. 15 5 RS 232C 3 6 RS 422 bl 200 gt 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the CQM1 Type Image Application pet GOT unit Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT Omron PLC connected RS Ae5eWGOT A9eGT 50WRS2 232C communication A953GOT with built in communication interface A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT _ A9GT RS4 Omron PLC connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS4 422 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface DIL a recommended product CPU and GOT CPU and converter Refer to Section 12 3 and fabricate on user side RS 422 cable between converter and GOT 12 5 12 5 12 OMRON PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 12 1 5 Connection with C1000H or C2000H 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the C1000H or C2000H The numbers 1 to 5 given in the system configurations denote the numbers to 5 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions _ Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance 3 Base mount type upper link unit Within 15m RS 232C cable Max 15m y B Base mo
38. For more high information refer to Chapter 5 Write from the GOT read command from the master station can be performed to only the remote outputs and remote registers of the Data communication processing 1 is d Disadvantage master station assigned to the GOT and to lower than that of cyclic transmission the internal registers GOT communication sequence program 2 is necessary 1 For details of the data communication processing speed object display speed refer to the GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 Reference Manual 2 This program is not needed if the CC Link parameter setting sequence program and GOT communication sequence program satisfy the following conditions As the PLC CPU of the master station use the QCPU mode or QnACPU whose number given in the DATE field of the rating plate is 9707B or later Use GX Developer or SW2 GPPW and make CC Link parameter setting and batch refresh device setting in the CC Link setting on the package For details of the setting methods refer to the CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual Details In transient transmission connection of several five or more as a guideline intelligent device stations GOTs and intelligent device units reduces data communication speed To raise data communication speed increase the CC Link system for example and do not connect five or more intelligent device stations to a
39. Item 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Control signal Make CS and CD invalid 19 MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC WORKS PLC MELSEC GOT 19 2 2 GOT side settings When the GOT is connected to the Matsushita Electric Works PLC for monitoring GOT side settings must be changed to meet the connected PLC settings Use Setup of the GOT unit s utility functions to set the transmission speed For details of the utility functions refer to the GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 Compatible Extended Functions Optional Functions OUTS SCREEN SAVE TIME 0 OMIN O FREE SCREEN SAVE LIGHT OFF LANGUAGE AAst REGE Baud rate 19200 T CHANGE START UP TIME 003 0 255 SEND MESSAGE DELAY 0 0 x1oms o 30 Setting item Factory setting Ch thet 1551 4800 9600 19200 38400 Baud rato oose the speed 19200 Make the same setting as for the PLC CPU used START UP TIME Set how seconds after GOT poweron the 3 communication with the PLC CPU will be started Set the waiting time from when the GOT has received data SEND MESSAGE DELAY Seno messace perav the PLC CPU until it sends data to the PLC CPU oo Select whether C C U monitor registration is made or not Choosing Yes for C C U monitor registration registers the device set on the GOT screen to the PLC CPU increasing the GOT monitor speed C C U MONITOR LOGON The utility functions can be starte
40. NO Correct setting using GT Designer and download project data again YES Are cables connected properly NO Does station Number set to monitor device exist in Ethernet settings NO ES Refer to Section 11 2 5 and make settings correctly YES NO Correct setting using GT Designer and download project data again Have GOT settings been made on utility YES NO Have Ethernet settings been made Make Ethernet settings using GT Designer and download project data again YES Does station set as host in Ethernet settings exist on Ethernet NO Correct setting using GT Designer and download project data again YES Have settings o Ethernet unit made for host been made correctly correctly NO Refer to Section 11 2 and make settings YES Check other Ethernet equipment and also adjust send time out boot up time and send wait time on utility POINT any of the above actions does not enable monitoring the possible cause is a GOT hardware fault Consult your sales representative 11 16 11 16 12 OMRON PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT Chapter12 Omron PLC connection 12 1 System configurations 12 1 1 Connection with C200H series 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the C200H series The numbers
41. QU A9GT 50WRS2 QnACPU p Computer link unit lt Ss RS 422 serial communication board jd mode Sy A9GT 50WRS4 eco MELSECNET II B connection Refer to Chapter 6 d Data link unit Data link unit A7GT J71AP23 optical loop connection ig ATGT J71AR23 coaxial loop connection i Master station A7GT J71AT23B twisted pair loop connection MELSECNET 10 connection to Chapter 7 i Network unit Control station A7GT J71LP23 optical loop connection eau A7GT J71BR13 coaxial loop connection CC Link connection Refer to Chapters 8 to 10 Master Local unit Intelligent device unit A8GT J61BT13 Remote device unit A8GT J61BT15 GPP function Se RS 422 serial ication board peripheral 4 p connection unit Ce AJ65BT G4 S3 SS Ethernet connection Refer to Chapter 11 Ethernet unit Master Local station EN Ethernet communication unit A9GT J71E71 T Mating device on Ethernet Microcomputer connection Refer to Chapter 20 PN RS 232C RS 422 serial communication board A9GT 50WRS2 Qa A9GT 50WRS4 Third party PLC connection lt RS 232C RS 422 serial communication board gt A9GT 50WRS2 Su 50 4 Omron PLC Refer to Chapter 12 Toshiba PLC Refer to Chapter 16
42. RWwm to RWwn Master station gt GOT with the always write register command RWwn E RWwn GOT Masterstation 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT c Communication overview When always writing data in the remote register to the GOT internal device GD100 110 and 120 PLC CPU Master station GOT remote register remote register RWwO 0803H RWwO 0803H Always write m 1 RWw1 0064H 2 RWwi 0064H regisier 1 L I RWw2 00C8H RWw2 00C8H RWw3 012CH RWw3 012CH RWwO 1234H RWwo 1234H 4 To 1 OE54H OE54H RWw2 0066H RWw2 0066H 2 Always write request GOT always write 1234 command request flag 34H 0E54H 0066H GOT internal device 1 Store the always write register command data in the master station s remote register RWw 2 Turn on the GOT request flag and store the command data in the GOT remote register RWw Command execution The GOT complete flag turns on when the command processing is complete 3 Store the always write data in the master station s remote register RWw 4 Always write the write data to the GOT internal device GD100 200 and 300 by turning on the GOT always write request flag 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT d Sequence program example Always ON FROM HO
43. Yaskawa PLC Refer to Chapter 13 Sharp PLC Refer to Chapter 15 Hitachi PLC Refer to Chapter 18 2 SPECIFICATION MELSEC GOT Chapter2 Specification 2 1 PLC CPU that allows monitoring 2 1 1 Applicable CPU list The PLC CPUs that can be monitored by the GOT are indicated below 1 MITSUBISHI PLC Q00JCPU QO0CPU Q01CPU TNT QCPU Q mode QO2CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU QCPU A mode QO2CPU A QO2HCPU A QO6HCPU A Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q2AHCPU Q2AHCPU S1 Q3ACPU QnACPU Type QnACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU QnASCPU Type Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 AnUCPU A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A4UCPU AnCPU Type AnACPU A2ACPU A2ACPU S1 A3ACPU AnNCPU A1NCPU A2NCPU A2NCPU S1 A3NCPU AnUS H A2USHCPU S1 CPU A1SCPUC24 R2 A2SCPU A2SCPU S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU A1FXCPU A0J2HCPU A2CCPU A2CCPUC24 A2CJCPU FXo Series FXos Series FXon Series FX1 Series FX1s Series FX4N Series FX1NC Series FX Series 2 Series Series Series A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU S3 A373CPU A373UCPU A373UCPU S3 A171SCPU A171SCPU S3 A171SCPU S3N A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU S1 Q172CPU Q173CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPUN FA controller LM610 LM7600 LM8000 1 As recommended for use in direct connection of the Q series basic model the GOT does not support the serial communication function 2 Use the fo
44. 1 For the system configuration on the serial communication unit side refer to the user s manual of the serial communication unit used 5 1 5 1 5 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 5 1 2 Connection with QCPU A mode 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume computer link connection with the QCPU A mode The numbers 1 to 6 given in the system configurations denote the numbers to 5 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions _ Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance 7 BlComputer link unit small type Within 15m 5 5 232 cable UNE Max 15m link unit small type NAM e 6 RS 422 cable Within 200m H 0 y la Max 200m gt 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the QCPU A mode Type Image Application GOT unit Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T Computer link connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 232C communication GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface 97 960 RS4 Computer link connected RS lAgseWGOT IASGT SOWRS4 sid 50WRS4 422 communication GOT A950GOT with built in commun
45. 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance Connected to TOOL port 4 FP peripheral 2 Adaptor 5 RS 232C Within 15 5 1 connection cable cable on jiji jet le Max 15 5m 1 GOT Link interface unit E 6 RS 232C cable Max 15m 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the FP5 Type GOT unit Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T Matsushita Electric Works A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 A953GOT with built in communication interface Image No Application Link interface unit FP peripheral connection cable between TOOL port of PLC AFP5520 0 5m CPU and adaptor RS 232C cable between adaptor and GOT RS 232C cable between link interface unit and GOT 1 Refer to Section 19 3 and fabricate on the user side User fabricated cable 1 AFC85853 3m 1 The RS 232C cable can be user fabricated Refer to Section 19 3 for details of the fabricating method User fabricated cable 2 19 5 19 5 19 MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC WORKS PLC MELSEC GOT 19 1 6 Connection with FP10 S 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assum
46. 20 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION 20 5 4 Batch read command RD Batch read command details are shown below 12 bytes f byte 1 byte T 2 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes Address Point Sum gt 02H 1 to 64 03H Error 15H Sum check range 1 Normal 260 bytes 1 byte 1 byte l 4 1 to 64 bytes gt 2 bytes Sum check range Example of use When D100 to D102 are read from the GOT virtual device STXR D Address Point ETX Sum check D Transmission from host to GOT 02H H MH ML L H L H L 1 Normal Transmission from GOT to host 20 11 20 11 20 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 20 5 5 Batch write command WD Batch write command details are shown below Max 268 bytes x i byte 1 byte V 2bytes 4bytes 2 bytes 4 x 1 to 64 bytes gt y 2 bytes 20 12 Address Sum check range p Normal end ACX NAK 06H 15H Example of use When 64H and 65H are written in D100 to D101 of the GOT virtual device Transmission from host to GOT Transmission from GOT to host Before execution After execution 20 12 20 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 20 5 6 Random re
47. 30m Max 35m 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the QnACPU small type or ACPU small type Type Application Bus connection Bus connection board 1 2 unit 1 2 A9GT BUSS A9GT BUSSU A9GT BUS2S A9GT BUS2SU A9GT BUSSU A9GT BUS2SU A9GT BUSSU A9GT BUS2SU A7GT BUSS A7GT BUS2S with built in communication interface E A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT BUS2S A9GT BUS2SU A9GT BUS2SU A9GT BUS2SU A7GT BUS2S GOT unit A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT 50WBUSS Bus connected GOT at termination Bus connected GOT at midpoint 2 2 gt gt gt Ko a a a 2 o o Q m A dA Unit for conversion of connection cable connectors and also for extension of distance between GOT and base unit Connection cable between A1SCO7B 0 7m A1SC12B 1 2m A1SC30B 3m base unit and GOT when A1SC50B 5m only GOT is connected A8GT C100EXSS 10m A8GT C200EXSS 20m A8GT C300EXSS 30m 3 5 6 A8GT C100EXSS 1 10m ABGT C200EXSS 1 20m ABGT C300EXSS 1 30m Connection cable between bus connector conversion box and GOT 3 5 6 Connection cable between base unit and bus connector conversion box 4 Connection cable between base unit and when A1SC0O7B 0 7m A1SC12B 1 2m A1SC30B 3m multiple GOTs are A1SC50B 5m
48. EH 150 Series EH CPU104 EH CPU208 EH CPU308 EH CPU316 FPO C16CT 2 FP1 C24C FP1 C40C FP2 H Series board type Matsushita Electric Works FP3 FP5 FP10 S FP10SH FP M C20TC FP M C32TC 2 SPECIFICATION MELSEC GOT 2 1 2 PLC CPU that can be monitored per connection form The PLC CPU that can be monitored by the GOT changes with the system up to the PLC CPU monitored connection form The PLC CPUs that can be monitored by the GOT are indicated below per connection form Applicable A Partly restricted Inapplicable PLC CPU Bus vanes Ethernet Intelligent Remote pose Monitored 1 Connection Connection Connection Connection MELSECTMELSEC E device device Via G4 NET H station station 3 ima OT os 9s 5 x pay TOTO Toy lacpu amodey O O P x oO oO of x x fens gt Oe Oe eS iF sat ee ACPU A1FXCPU ATEXORU ES NU Acme meses srl GPU Q series eie aa ee 8 CPU A series cy pe ee Yaskawa PLC x x x x x E91 3 9 E Supp mero meson a ae Ea x x x x ESE nose p a een ff fp HITACHI PLC PLC HITACHI PLO we Works PLC
49. File access failure Please try again Execute PLC Read or PLC Write again when ladder read is not being executed with the ladder monitor function of a GOT Execute PLC Read or PLC Write again when the recipe in process signal in the system information of a GOT is OFF Execute PLC Read or PLC Write again when the TC monitor screen is not being read Execute PLC Read or PLC Write again when the PC diagnosis monitor screen unit detailed information screen is not being read with the special unit monitor function 4 CPU DIRECT CONNECTION ids Sc MELSEC GOT 9 When the PLC CPU is monitored by a peripheral device such as a personal computer the display speed of the GOT decreases 10 For 45 seconds after exit from GX Developer the GOT remains at the same monitor speed as during use of the transparent function 11 The access range of GX Developer does not change when the transparent function is used 12 If the either of following operations which will stop the monitoring of the GOT is performed the transparent function will stop a Monitor screen data is downloaded or uploaded using GT Designer or OS or ROM BIOS is installed 1 b Setup or screen amp OS copy is executed on the GOT unit 1 c When no communication request online monitor etc has been issued from GX Developer for 45 seconds 1 A time out error will occur on GX Developer When the option function such as the utilit
50. Introductory Manual For those who use the GOT for the first time describes the way to create a monitor screen on GT SH 0801 16 Designer transfer monitor data to the GOT and display it on the screen 1DM141 Available as option GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 Reference Manual Deals with the system configuration of GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 the screen makeup of the GT Designer the general description of various monitoring functions the procedure for displaying the monitor screen on the GOT and how to use the help function Available as option GT Simulator Version 5 Operating Manual 080120 Explains the system configuration screen makeup and using methods of GT Simulator 1DM191 Available as option GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 compatible Gateway Functions Manual Explains the specifications system configuration setting methods and others of the gateway functions that can be performed on the GOT A900 series SH 080254 1DM212 Available as option A985GOT A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT User s Manual Explains the specifications general system configuration component devices part names option unit loading methods installation and wiring methods maintenance and inspection methods and error codes of A985GOT A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT unit SH 4005 1DM099 Available as option A950GOT A951GOT A953GOT A956GOT User s Manual Explai
51. MELSEC GOT 2 When using KS 10P RS 232C RS 422 converter RS232C signal 1 FG Setting of jumper 2 RD 1 1 OFF 3 12 22 0 1 2 4 CS 1 3 RS 14 CD 1 5 SG 1 6 1 7 1 8 2 Connector and connector cover Connector for GOT Connector with cover 17JE 23250 02 D8A6 DDK Connector for CQM1 Use connector attached to the CQM1 e When using EL LINE II RS 232C D Sub 25 pin male screw type RS 422 D Sub 25 pin female screw type When using KS 10P RS 232C D Sub 9 pin male screw type RS 422 D Sub 25 pin female screw type Precautions for cable preparation The cable length including the converter must be 200m 655 74feet or shorter 12 22 13 YASKAWA PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT Chapter13 Yaskawa PLC connection 13 1 System configurations 13 1 1 Connection with GL60S GL60H or GL70H 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the GL60S GL60H or GL70H The numbers 1 to 6 given the system configurations denote the numbers 6 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance 3 Memo bus unit B RS 232C cable Changes
52. REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 2 Continuous read command a Continuous read command This is a command to read data for a specified number of points from the specified head GOT internal device to the remote register b Command format Transfer Direction Write data RWwm Higher byte 2 Continuous read setting When the occupied points are 2 stations 1 to 6 GOT internal device point to be read When the occupied points are 4 stations 1 to 14 GOT internal device point to be read 0 to 1023 Head GOT internal device numbers to RWwm 1 maoa RR read RWwm 2 to RWwm F 2 to RWwm RWwm Lower byte Master station the data to be read from the GOT internal GOT Master station amd device RWrn E RWrn F c Communication overview When reading three points from the GOT internal device GD100 to the remote register RWr PLC CPU Master station GOT remote register remote register 1 RWwO 0203H 2 RWwO 0203H RWw1 0064H RWw1 0064H 4 RWrO 1234H 3 1234H 1 RW OE54H RWr1 OE54H RWr2 0066H RWr2 0066H GD100 1234H GD101 OE54H GD102 0066H GOT internal device 1 Store the continuous read command data in the master station s remote register RWw 2 Turn on the GOT request flag and read the data in GD100 to 102 are read to the remote register RWr by storing the command da
53. RS 422 A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS4 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface RS 232C cable between CPU and GOT RS 422 cable between CPU Refer to Section 15 4 and fabricate on user side and GOT RS 422 cable between link unit and GOT 15 4 15 4 15 SHARP PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 15 2 Initial setting 15 2 1 Connecting directly to the PLC CPU To connect the GOT to the PLC CPU directly it is necessary to make initial settings of the communication port Set the system memory of the PLC CPU with the peripheral tool as follows For details of the setting method refer to the operation manual of the Sharp PLC 1 When using JW 22CUH JW 70CUH and JW 100CUH Setting details Set the transmission speed the parity and the stop bit to the bit of DO to D5 as follows D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO 2 1 1 ofo o 1 ewm specification 9600bps Setting of communication Parity even number port Stop bit 2 bit Set the station number as follows 237 1 nn No 1 2 When using JW 32CUH and JW 33CUH Setting details Set the transmission speed the parity and the stop bit to the bit of DO to D5 as follows D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO 234 EE specification 19200bps Setting of communication even number port 1 Stop bit 2 bit Set the station number as follows 235 1 Station No 1 Set the transmission speed the p
54. Transmission code ASCII 7 bit Sw1 f Sw Stop bit 2 SW 4 5V supply switch If optical interface Z3RN A 5 is used set the switch to ON with 5V supply If not be sure to set the switch to OFF SW No ON OFF 1 Not used Set the switch to OFF Switches on the back 3 1 N procedure 1 1 procedure 4 With 5V supply Without 5V supply 5 CTS switch To keep the CTS ON set the switch to OV To receive the CTS from outside set the switch to External For normal use set the switch to OV M manm 12 10 12 10 12 OMRON PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 2 When using C200H LK202 V1 Switches on the front 1 SW1 and SW2 Machine No Set SW1 0 SW2 0 Machine No 00 LK202 V1 RUN XM 2 SW3 Transmission speed Set SW3 6 19 2 kbps ERROR 3 SW4 Command level parity transmission code Set SW4 2 Parity Even Transmission code ASCII 7 bit Stop bit 2 sw1 0 4 Terminator connection switch Al SW3 Set this switch to ON Present 5 1 N procedure switch Set this switch to OFF N procedure Switches on the back 12 11 12 11 12 OMRON PL NNECTION MELSEC GOT 3 When using C500H LK201 V1 Switches on the front 1 Upper link local switch Set this switch to Upper link Operating 2 Switch for RS 232C RS 422
55. connected gt 2 Q ui 2 UJ A8GT C100EXSS 10m A8GT C200EXSS 20m A8GT C300EXSS 30m A8GT C100EXSS 1 10m ABGT C200EXSS 1 20m ABGT C300EXSS 1 30m A1SCO5NB 0 5m A1SCO7NB 0 7m A1SC30NB 3m A1SC50NB 5m A1SCO7B 0 7m A1SC12B 1 2m A1SC30B 3m A1SC50B 5m A8GT C100BS 10m _ A8GT C200BS 20m A8GT C300BS 30m Connection cable between GOT and GOT 5 1 There are the following differences between the bus connection board and bus connection unit A9GT BUSS U Has one interface and usable with the GOT at termination Unusable with the GOT at midpoint A9GT BUS2S U Has two interfaces and usable with the GOT at termination and the GOT at midpoint 2 A single GOT does not accept multiple bus connection units and bus connection boards 3 When using the bus connection cable A8GT C100EXSS A8GT C200EXSS A8GT C300EXSS connect the connection cable connectors as indicated below Connector COM1 PLC CPU side Connector COM2 GOT side 4 When the extension base unit is used the sum of cable lengths of the extension cable between base unit and base unit and connection cable this cable should be within 6m 5 When using the bus connection cable ABGT C100EXSS A8GT C200EXSS A8GT C300EXSS A8GT C100BS A8GT C200BS A8GT C300BS always connect the ground wires green wires 1m coming out of the connectors at both ends of the cable to the control box or like Connect both groun
56. 1 15 E amp E C Connected to port RS 232C cable Within 15m Max 15m 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the FP1 C24C or FP1 C40C Applicati Type mage ication 9 PP GOT unit Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T Matsushita Electric Works A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 PLC connected GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface FP peripheral connection cable between TOOL port of PLC AFP15205 0 5m CPU and adaptor RS 232 972920 cable beween Refer to Section 19 3 and fabricate on the user side User fabricated cable 1 adaptor and GOT RS 232C cable between COM Refer to Section 19 3 and fabricate on the user side User fabricated cable 3 port of PLC CPU and GOT 19 2 19 2 19 MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC WORKS PLC MELSEC GOT 19 1 3 Connection with FP2 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the FP2 The numbers 1 to 5 given in the system configuration denote the numbers 1 to 5 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Conditions System Configuration connec
57. 1 Bar code reader x nete eme dealt eite tte ad e ce RECTO 21 1 21 1 1 System configuration 21 1 21 2 21 2 1 System configuration deed dene de ede eode ede e eee o e Dee P Ee du De e an Pee 21 2 21 2 2 Connection cable rre re e erect ep eee tots 21 3 21 3 External 4 21 4 21 3 1 System configurations nennen rennen A enne 21 4 21 3 2 Connection cables eite t de ettet eo ue tage a e up Ng ne ee we Ye HER ug 21 6 21 3 3 Wiring dlagraimis ce ERR Mes e t P e e Rc Le e e eins 21 10 21 3 4 Recommended user prepared articles and how to prepare them 21 13 PNA PG Cand Me M ERN 21 14 21 4 1 System configurations eed ede tede nde te fede ee te Fe Deo e Deo ue De a e uvae dne 21 14 21 5 Video Cameras tec a bert e IR e re rr UP re rre ep e rete pae e rri Pe ege t 21 15 21 5 1 System configurations nennen nnne nnne nnne nennen nnne nre enne 21 15 21 5 2 Coaxial cable 4d en a 21 17 21 5 3 Connection n i tte e pe E e tage deo et ue d redeo 21 19 21 6 Personal computer when RGB screen is displayed sse 21 20 21 6 1 System configuration a a 21 20 21 6 2 Connect cable Re ere te rr ERE ra th ea eae 21 21 21
58. 19 MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC WORKS PLC MELSEC GOT 2 User fabricated cable 2 a Connection diagram GOT D sub 9 pin female inch screw type PLC CPU D sub 9 pin male Cable connection and direction of signal Pin No RD RXD SD TXD 75 b Connector and connector cover Connector for GOT HDEB 9S 05 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD HDE CTH1 4 40 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD PLC CPU side connector D sub 9 pin male connector c Precautions for cable preparation Fabricate the cable within the length of 15m 49 18feet However fabricate it within 3m when the GOT PLC CPU transmission speed used is 38400bps 19 12 19 12 19 9 MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC WORKS PLC MELSEC GOT 3 User fabricated cable 3 a Connection diagram GOT D sub 9 pin female inch screw type PLC CPU D sub 9 pin male Cable connection and direction of signal RD RXD SD TXD fe b Connector and connector cover Connector for GOT HDEB 9S 05 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD HDE CTH1 4 40 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD PLC CPU side connector D sub 9 pin female connector secured by M2 6 screw c Precautions for cable preparation Fabricate the cable within the length of 15m 49 18feet 19 13 19 13 19 MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC WORKS PLC MELSEC GOT 4 User fabricated cable 4 a Connection diagram GOT AFP8550 converter adaptor D sub 9 pin female Cable connection and direct
59. 5 in the Help About menu of GT Designer Version Information COPYRIGHT C 2000 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED GT Designer Version 5 26C SW5D5 GOTR PACKE This product is licensed to the following person GT Designer Version 5 26C NAME PELEH COMPANY Software version Caution This product is protected by Japanese copyright Copying reproducing or distributing all or any part of this p its copyright OK 11 1 11 1 11 ETHERNET CONNECTION 11 1 System configuration 1 System configuration and connection conditions The following system configuration and connection conditions assume Ethernet connection with the PLC CPU MELSEC GOT 11 The numbers 1 to 3 given in the system configuration denote the numbers 1 to 3 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected 1 3 distance 1 a 2 Ethernet unit 128 GOTs 16 units or less recommended 7 Within 100m 4 10BASE T cable Longest 1 Depends on the specifications of the Ethernet network system where the GOT is connected For details refer to the manual of the Ethernet unit used ne N b Max 100m 2 Where the 10BASE T cable is connected depends on the configuration of the Ethernet network system used Co
60. BNC connector with the coaxial cable 1 Remove the outer sheath of the end of the coaxial cable as shiown below p IEEE Sey 15mm 0 59inch Y Remove the outer sheath 2 Slip a nut a washer a gasket and a clamp on the coaxial cable as shown below and loosen the outer conductor Gasket 3 Cut the outer conductor insulating material and internal conductive material to specified dimensions shown below Cut the outer conductor and extend it over the end of the clamp Internal Insulating material conductive material 3mm 0 12inch Clamp and 0 24inch outer conductor 4 Solder the contact to the tip of the internal conductive material Soldering 5 Insert the contact assembly in plug shell and engage the plug shell with the nut 1 Soldered part must not have excess solder mound 2 The tail end of the contact must come into close contact with the cut end of the insulating material The contact must not be cutting in the insulating material 3 Apply solder quickly so that the insulating material may not be deformed by heat Connector at the video camera and the vision sensor Use the connector applicable to the video camera and the vision sensor 3 Precautions for cable preparation The cable length depends on the specifications of the video camera used Fabricate the cable within the range of the video camera specifications 21 18 21 18 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELS
61. CONNECTION G4 MELSEC GOT 10 2 Initial settings The following settings must be made for monitoring by connection of the GOT and G4 1 Settings to be made as CC Link system When the GOT is used for monitoring the CC Link system integrated with the G4 must have been established For the way to make settings as the CC Link system refer to the user s manual of the master unit used and the G4 User s Manual 2 G4 settings When the GOT is used for monitoring the operation mode must be set to the Q mode with the operation setting switches of the G4 Refer to the G4 User s Manual for details of the setting method MITSUBISHI Avsset c4 sa BRATE STATION NO 10 4 RUNO LRUNO 520 RDO LERR O DIP switches Operation setting 000000 SW 12345678 11 422 The G4 is a unit designed to integrate GPP function peripheral device onto the CC Link system Hence the user s manual gives detailed explanation of how to make settings to connect the GPP function peripheral device Since the setting method for other than the operation mode is similar to that for use by connection of the GOT read the description as appropriate 10 2 10 2 11 ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSEC GOT Chapter 11 Ethernet connection Before making Ethernet connection carefully read the manual of the Ethernet u
62. D100 k2 3 Transfers master station SET M148 3 GOT request ON RST M300 2 RST M306 2 SET M301 1 M201 Read the read data to 42 H FROM HO 2 0200 KB D PLC CPU RST M148 2 RST M301 2 SET M302 1 For executing next step M302 M58 M4S E 52 41 AF Move 302 0100 J Randam read data storage MOVP HOFA D101 1 Randam read data storage MOvP HOFF 0102 1 Randam read data storage To HO HIE 0100 3 Transfers master station SET M148 3 GOT request ON RST M302 2 SET M303 3 For excuting next step M303 a Ded is J Head GD250 and 251 to zu 0400 and 401 RST M148 1 RST M303 2 M304 3 For excuting next step sap M wee wae H406 0100 1 1 Continuous write data H 5 D101 2 storage Transfers D500 to 505 to BMOVP 0500 0102 KB 0102 to 108 To HiED 0100 3 Transfers master station SET M148 3 GOT request ON RST M304 SET M305 3 For executing next step M305 M48 pa 103 RST M148 1 RST M305 2 der 806 executing continuous io read command To HO H163 KAMI 48 KI Remote output RY write 114 END J 10 CC LINK CONNECTION G4 MELSEC GOT Chapter 10 CC Link connection via G4 10 1 System configuration 1 System configuration and connection conditions The following system configuration and connection conditions assume CC Link connection via G4 with the QCPU Q mode Th
63. DIRECT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 4 1 2 Connection with QnACPU or ACPU 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configuration and connection conditions assume CPU direct connection with the QnACPU or ACPU The numbers 1 to 2 given in the system configurations denote the numbers J to 2 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance in ind 2 RS 422 cable 1 GOT Within 30m ae Max 30m 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the QnACPU or ACPU plus Type Image No Application GOT unit Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT 9 54 CPU direct connected RS 422 Sm A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS4 communication GOT uth tu 0 4 with built in communication interface RS 422 cable between QnACPU ACPU and GOT AC30R4 25P 3 0m AC100R4 25P 10 0m AC300R4 25P 30 0m 4 CPU DIRECT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 4 1 3 Connection with FXCPU FXo FXos FX1N FX1NC FX1S FX2N FX2NC series 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume CPU direct connection with the FXCPU FXo FXos FX1N FX1NC FX1s FX2N FX2NC series The numbers 1 t
64. Designer The following explains how to set devices defined with GT Designer when connected via Ethernet Ethernet setting list x Host NAW No PLC E address No Communication 1 Janen 19246801 som UDF Edi i 1 1 Set to Host 1 If Ethernet unit 1 an Ethernet unit set as local station is monitored by GOT set the network setting to the local station when the device is set with GT Designer lt Setting example with GT Designer gt Device r Device p OK 1 2 s aleje o r Extended Bit position 2 Block Unit Network Host C Other NW Station No mal 2 If Ethernet unit 2 an Ethernet unit that is not set as local station is monitored by GOT set the network setting to other station network No 1 personal computer station No 2 when the device is set with GT Designer Setting example with GT Designer Device Device pz mm gt JE 9 BK c pu Sipps Com Extended Bit position D Block D H Unittopiza foo Network NW Station No e 11 14 11 14 11 ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 11 2 5 GOT side settings 11 15 When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network system for monitoring Ethernet settings must be made to the GOT unit Use Setup of the GOT unit s utility functions to make Ethernet settings For details o
65. E re eda 11 3 11 22 When USING QET tete frc etu ete ue e P Pte tous 11 8 11 2 3 When using Q Series Compatible E71 sese 11 11 11 2 4 How to Set Devices Using GT 11 14 11 2 5 GOT side settings aerei epit etie tet pee ti e eie oL id e le edo e dei Re D 11 15 11 3 Troubleshooting for disabled 11 16 12 Systemi cornflgurations ee eee e ne ee een aen ee e e e ud 12 1 12 1 1 Connection with C200ET Series 5 2 0 ape enden inea n me et d ined iP eade 12 1 12 1 2 Connection with C200HS 12 2 12 1 3 Connection with C200Ha series 12 3 12414 Connection with COMTI re aes heli el ullae 12 5 12 1 5 Connection with C1000H or 2000 12 6 12 1 6 Connection with CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 CPU01 CVM1 CPU11 CVM1 CPU21 12 7 12 7 Connection With te ene wade seemed cae 12 8 12 1 8 Connection with G1 e ere enna elit ire een ere 12 9 12 2 Initial Setting 12 10 12 2 1 Switch setting of upper link unit 12 10 12 2 2 Setting CV500 VC1000 CV200
66. Ltd make CNCOM 05 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the H 200 to 252 series H series board type or EH 150 series Image No Application Type iti Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T Hitachi PLC RS itachi PLC connected 5 ee SOT A9GT 50WRS2 232C communication GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface RS 232C cable bet CPU cabe between Refer to Section 18 3 and fabricate on user side 18 2 18 2 18 HITACHI PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 18 2 Initial settings 18 2 1 PLC side settings For monitoring with connection to the GOT make the communication settings and the port settings with the peripheral tool as follows For details refer to the operation manual of the HITACHI PLC 1 CPU direct connection 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Station No 0 Data length Stop bit 1 Parity bit Even The upper limit of the transmission speed that may be set changes with the Hitachi PLC used 2 Link interface unit connection a For transmission control protocol 1 _ StionNo RS 232C communication RS 232C MODE switch 2 TE h Communication meted RS 422 communication RS 422 MODE switch 2 For transmission control protocol 2 00 Stop bit 1 RS 232C communication RS 232C MODE switch 9 RS 422 communication RS 422 MODE switch 9 Communication met
67. Manual about the program for setting CC Link parameter SMan 0 FROM AM 4 Remote input RX read MO 6 0100 Program for switching screen 1 h itchi HIE 0100 1 Store t ie screen Switching infomation in the master station M 15 MCP 0100 Program for switching screen 2 T0 Ho HE D100 Store the screen switching infomation in the master station FROM H2E0 D200 3 Planned quantity read program 291 4 0100 1 Program for switching screen Ho D100 1 Store the screen switching infomationin the master station D200 D103 3 Store D200 to D202 in D103 to D105 Store the production quantity 0 HO 0101 KB and planned quantity siai in the master station 47 TO HO H160 K4 Remote output RY write 53 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 9 3 2 Sequence Program Example When Monitoring Using Dedicated Command Monitor Method The following system example is used to describe the sequence program in this section Refer to the CC Link Master Module User s Manual regarding the sequence program for the entire CC Link system 1 System configuration of the program example 2 Station No Number of 1 station stations occupied 2 station setting Relationship among the PLC CPU master station buffer memory a
68. Manufacturer Connector DE 9SF N Japan Aviation Electronics Industr DE C1 J6 S6 i c Fabricating instruction Always use a shielded multi core cable and connect the shield with FG securely Fabricate the cable within a 15m length 2 RS 422 cable How to fabricate the cables for connection of the RS 232C RS 422 converter and servo amplifiers is shown below a Connection diagram First axis servo amplifier Second axis servo amplifier 32nd axis last axis 1 CN3 connector CN3 connector servo amplifier CN3 connector RS 232C RS 422 cable SDP SDN GND GND 1 At the last axis connect TRE and RDN 21 24 21 24 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT b Used connectors and connector covers RS 232C RS 422 converter side connector 17JE 23250 02 D8A6 DDK Servo amplifier interface unit side connector Connector set MR J2CN1 Connector 10120 3000VE Sumitomo 3M Ltd Shell kit 10320 52F0 008 c Fabricating instruction Fabricate the cable within a 30m length 21 25 21 25 APPENDICES MELSEC GOT Appendices Appendix 1 System configuration example for microcomputer connection The following system configuration example is given for microcomputer connection Refer to this section when configuring a microcomputer connection system fame Appendix 1 1 System configu
69. QJ61BT11N 1 A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11 CC Link system master local unit 3 CC Link dedicated cable Refer to the user s manual of the CC Link master local unit used 1 Set the station No that corresponds to the GOT as Ver 1 intelligent device station in the CC Link parameter settings of GX Developer 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 9 2 Monitoring Specification 9 2 1 Monitoring Overview When the A8GT J61BT15 is used the GOT has the following two monitoring methods Monitor Method Normal Monitor Dedicated Command Monitor The remote inputs outputs and remote registers Pee of the GOT assigned to the remote device Description und internal device transfer command area to station in the CC Link parameter setting are specified and monitored The remote register area is used as the GOT specify and monitor the GOT internal devices Data update processing speed is high Since a dedicated command is executed to develop data in the GOT internal word devices GDO to GD1023 multiple pieces of T information such as the operating status Data update processing speed is high production and operation directives be monitored within one screen The number of devices that can be displayed on one screen is larger than that of normal As the remote register assignment area of the A sequence program is needed to execute the GOT is small the number of devic
70. Reciving For RS 422 communication set this switch to RS 422 up Sendin 9 For RS 232C communication Transmission error set this switch to RS 232C down 3 Switch for internal external clock Mode setting Set this switch to Internal up Upper level link GE 2 Local 4 Terminator connection switch Set this switch to Present down 5 CTS switch Set this switch to OV up 6 SW1 Machine No ON OFF of operation Set the switches as follows 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF oFF orFF oFF orF orFF OFF ON Switches on the back A Machine No 00 Operation 7 SW2 Transmission speed 1 N procedure Level 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 19 2KBPS Levels 1 2 and 3 are effective 1 N procedure 12 12 12 12 12 OMRON PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 12 2 2 Setting CV500 VC1000 CV2000 CVM1 CPU01 CVM1 CPU11 CVM1 CPU21 CS1 CJ1 1 Switches For CPU CV500 VC1000 CV2000 CVM1 CPU01 CVM1 CPU11 CVM1 CPU21 CS1 CJ1 set the switches as follows a When CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 CPU01 CVM1 CPU11 or CVM1 CPU21 is used Switches on the front HOST LINK RS 232 RS 422 b When CS1 is used Cover RUN O ERR ALM O INH 12 13 1 Swi
71. Remote ready flag RX n 3 B RX n 7 B Turns on during the GOT startup Turns off during off line operations OS installation and screen data download and initial processing execution 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 9 2 3 Remote Register Allocation The remote register allocation for GOT is described below The usage of the remote registers is different between the normal monitor method and dedicated command monitor method The m and n in the table indicates the address allocated to the master module by the station number setting 1 When the normal monitor method The entire area is used for user region Transfer Direction Number of umber ot comple sieten stations Description Default Value 4stations Master station gt GOT RWwm to RWwm 7 RWwm to RWwm F Userwritearea 0o Master station RWr to RWm 7 RWmtoRWmsF Userreadara 0 2 When the dedicated command monitor method The entire area is used for the GOT internal device communication commands Refer to Section 9 2 4 regarding each command for the GOT internal device communication Transfer Direction Number of Se I ee stations Description Default Value 2station station Astaions stations Command execution area Master station to be monitored by using GOT internal device Command response area Master station to be monitored by using GOT internal device 9 CC LINK CON
72. YDO 17 DC12 24V B17 DC12 24V 18 DC12 24V B18 OV 19 OV B19 Vacant A20 Vacant B20 FG Z DC12 24V 21 6 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT b Connector and connector cover used 12 24VDC power 3 User s any connector Number Name Type Maker Connector with cover A6CON1 Mitsubishi Electric Connector FCN 361JO40 AU Connector cover FCN 360CO40 B Pair shielded cable UL 2464 AWG26 or equivalent FG wire UL 1015 AWG14 or equivalent Wires for connection of Fujitsu UL 1007 AWG24 or equivalent external input power c Precaution for cable fabrication The cable fabricated should be within 20m long 21 7 21 7 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 2 Connection cable for use between external I O unit and connector terminal block conversion unit Instead of using the dedicated cable A8GT C30TB the user can fabricate the connection cable for use between the external I O unit and connector terminal block conversion unit When fabricating the connection cable refer to the following a Connection diagram Connector terminal block
73. Yaskawa PLC Refer to Chapter 13 SIEMENS PLC Refer to Chapter 17 Allen Bradley PLC Refer to Chapter 14 Hitachi PLC Refer to Chapter 18 Sharp PLC Refer to Chapter 15 Matsushita PLC Refer to Chapter 19 PLC Microcomputer boarc Third party PLC 1 OVERVIEW 3 956 Refer to Chapter Bus connection Bus connection interface unit A9GT QBUSS2U Bus connection interface unit A9GT BUSSU A9GT BUS2SU A7GT BUSSU A7GT BUS2SU MELSECNET II B connection Data link unit A7GT J71AP23 optical loop connection A7GT J71AR23 coaxial loop connection A7GT J71AT23B twisted pair loop connection Refer to Chapter 6 A956GOT MELSECNET 10 connection Refer to Chapter 7 Network unit A7GT J71LP23 optical loop connection A7GT J71BR13 coaxial loop connection CC Link connection Refer to Chapters 8 to 9 Q Ethernet connection Refer to Chapter 11 Ethernet communication unit A9GT J71E71 T Intelligent device unit A8GT J61BT13 Remote device unit A8GT J61BT15 4 A953GOT CPU direct connection Refer to Chapter 4 Computer link connection Refer to Chapter 5 A953GOT Microcomputer connection Refer to Chapter20 Third party PLC connection Omron PLC Refer to Chapter 12 Toshiba PLC Yaskawa PLC Refer to Chapte
74. and A8GT C100BS 10m C200BS 20m C300BS 30m respectively The length of the ABGT EXCNB 0 5m need not be considered when calculating the cable length 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 3 2 3 Connection with QnACPU small type or ACPU small type 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume bus connection with the QnACPU small type or ACPU small type The numbers 1 to 8 given the system configurations denote the numbers 8 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Up to three GOTs may be connected Select the connection cables whose lengths satisfy the conditions of the maximum distance depending on the connection conditions Installing a single connected GOT more than 35m away requires the bus connector conversion box 3 Connection Conditions Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance Y Within 30m 4 Connection cable 1GOT LD BJB t DY y us connector conversion box More than ok ZY 5 Connection cable Max 35m CO E 1 First GOT within 5m 8 Connection cable Max 35m First GOT more than 5m 5 Connection cable Max 30m First GOT within 5m 7 Connection cable 8 cable 8 Connection cable 5 gt le Max
75. applicable A985GOT TBA TBD V Hardware version Jan 2001 or later A985GOT TBD Hardware version N Jan 2001 or later A985GOT TBA Hardware version J Jan 2001 or later A975GOT TBA TBD B Hardware version G Jan 2001 or later A970GOT SBA SBD LBA LBD TBA B TBD B Hardware version G Jan 2001 or later A960GOT EBA EBD Hardware version D Jan 2001 or later 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 3 2 2 Connection with QnACPU large type or ACPU large type 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume bus connection with the QnACPU large type or ACPU large type The numbers 1 to 7 given in the system configurations denote the numbers in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Up to three GOTs may be connected Select the connection cables whose lengths satisfy the conditions of the maximum distance depending on the connection conditions Installing the first connected GOT more than 6 6m away requires the bus connector conversion box 3 Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance v UU Within 6 6m 7 4 Connection cable 6 6m 1 GOT LI IY LITT wy yy 3 Bus connector S Jt conversion box More than LL aL Pu Z 6 Connection cable 5 Connection cable
76. between bus connector conversion box and GOT 3 5 6 Connection cable between base unit and bus connector conversion box 4 Connection cable between base unit and GOT when multiple GOTs are connected Connection cable between ATSCO7B 0 7m GOT and GOT 5 A8GT C100BS 10m 1 There are the following differences between the bus connection board and bus connection unit A9GT BUSS U _ Has one interface and usable with the GOT at termination Unusable with the GOT at midpoint A9GT BUS2S U Has two interfaces and usable with the GOT at termination and the GOT at midpoint 2 Asingle GOT does not accept multiple bus connection units and bus connection boards 3 When using the bus connection cable A8GT C100EXSS A8GT C200EXSS A8GT C300EXSS connect the connection cable connectors as indicated below Connector COM1 PLC CPU side Connector COM2 GOT side 4 When the extension base unit is used the sum of cable lengths of the extension cable between base unit and base unit and connection cable this cable should be within 6m 5 When using the bus connection cable ABGT C100EXSS A8GT C200EXSS A8GT C300EXSS A8GT C100BS A8GT C200BS A8GT C300BS always connect the ground wires green wires 1m coming out of the connectors at both ends of the cable to the control box or like A1SCO7B 0 7m A1SC12B 1 2m A1SC30B 3m A8GT C100EXSS 10m A8GT C200EXSS 20m A8GT C300EXSS 30m A8GT C100EXSS 1 10m A
77. by the network parameter at the connected station local station NW number 0 Station number Local station 2 When monitoring other stations other than B and W other network Station connected to GOT L2 12 0 Local_ 0 Local_ 1 3 1 3 0 Other 2 2 2 1 Other 1 0 Local 2 Other 1 2 Other 4 0 Local M ree a ee GOT 2 3 0 Other 2 0 Other 4 0 Other 2 Lea M eme m EL _ waa J PA Jo 1 When monitoring the data link system designate the NW number as 0 How to read the 2 Other 2 table T 7 5 NW number Station number 2 SPECIFICATION MELSEC GOT Example 3 When using CPU direct connection or computer link connection Control station Control station Q Q Mode 1 2 1 Data link parameter Effective unit number for accessing other stations is designated to the unit number that is connected to the network No 1 Monitor access range of other station devices other than B and W other network Station to be Network No 1 Network No 2 accessed a 2 AnU 1 1 AnA 1 3 AnU 1 4 QnA 2 1 AnU 2 2 AnN 2 3 AnU 2 4 ded to GOT AnU 1 1 x x Q Q Mode 1 2 4 Local AnU 2 Q ee 2 QnA 1 Pox
78. cable Within 3m Max 3m onnected to COM port 3 RS 232C cable Within 15m Max 15m 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the FPO C16CT or 2 Type Image Application GOT unit Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T Matsushita Electric Works A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 PLC connected GOT RS 232C cable between TOOL port of PLC CPU and GOT AFC8503 3m A953GOT with built in communication interface 3 mE RS 232C cable between COM 19 Refer to Section 19 3 and fabricate on user side User fabricated cable 4 port of PLC CPU and GOT ferio Scion 19 3 an frat on use sd User fabricated cable 19 1 19 1 19 MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC WORKS PLC MELSEC GOT 19 1 2 Connection with FP1 C24C or FP1 C40C 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the FP1 C24C or FP1 C40C The numbers 1 to 5 given in the system configuration denote the numbers 1 to 5 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance 3 FP peripheral Connected tion to TOOL E 2 Adaptor 4 RS 232C e Within 15 5m mum cable
79. computer uu GOT Side Side Cable connection and direction of signal in No Signal name o c Connection diagram of FX 232CAB 1 Personal computer TNT GOT Side Side Cable connection and direction of signal inNo Signal RXD 2 4 CPU DIRECT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT d When using the software DOS version for motion controller CPU A series Personal computer t TU GOT Side Side Cable connection and direction of signal in No Signal name es es 1 This RS 232C cable should not be used to transfer the monitor screen data of GT Designer 2 Connector and connector cover connector Use the screw in type connector inch for the GOT side e Personal computer connector Use the connector compatible with the Personal computer 3 Precautions for cable preparation The cable must be 15 m 49 21 feet or shorter 4 CPU DIRECT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT MEMO 5 COMPUTER CONNECTION MELSEC GOT Chapter5 Computer link connection 5 1 System configurations Connect a termination resistor 330 1 4W orange orange brown r1 on the computer link unit serial communication unit or modem interface unit side On the GOT side you need not connect the termination resistor since the GOT contains it 5 1 1 Con
80. connected to the duplex extension base A68RB of version A 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 3 2 System configurations Always connect the GOT to the last base unit The GOT cannot be connected between base units 3 2 1 Connection with QCPU mode 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume bus connection with the QCPU Q mode The numbers 1 to 5 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 1 to 5 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Up to five GOTs may be connected Select the connection cables whose lengths satisfy the conditions of the maximum distance depending on the connection conditions Installing the first connected GOT more than 13 2m away requires the bus extension connector box 3 When the Q00JCPU is used however the bus extension connector box 3 cannot be used and the GOT should therefore be installed within 13 2m Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance LUD LL E Within 13 2m 4 Connection cable 13 2m use the bus extension connector box 1 GOT extension lt fit it to the extension connector of the base unit connector Plug the connection cable into the bus extension connector box VY More than COPY ALI 13 2m H Fahy LE i
81. due to the damage of the screws or module N CAUTION e Do not disassemble or modify the module Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the module directly Doing so can cause a module malfunction or failure e The cables connected to the module must be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the module or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault e When unplugging the cable connected to the module do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the module or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Disposal Instructions N CAUTION e When disposing of the product handle it as industrial waste REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Aug 2000 SH NA 080119 A First edition Oct 2000 SH NA 080119 B Nob 2000 SH 080119 Partial corrections Section 2 1 Section 5 1 2 Section 6 1 2 Partial additions Section 2 3 2 Section 4 1 3 Section 4 2 Section Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Section 15 1 2 Section 15 1 4 Section 15 1 6 Partial additions Section 1 1 Section 16 1 Additions Section 15 5 Section 15 6 Feb 2001 SH NA 080119 D Overall reexamination of the contents including
82. ea eee eae 13 6 18 3 Connection Cable 2 22 cect e n e tee de de denies dee a dan aa e a a e t e d ee 13 7 13 3 1T RS 422 cable rper egere rp ere epe arp eee cepere ep eene etg ee 13 7 13 3 2 RS 232C destin deities deinde an inet ae in eee neha nares 13 9 1421 System cOnfIgUEaltions ete e ee d eter e ee etd 14 1 14 1 1 Connection with SL C500 series sssssssssssssssseeseeeneennee nennen nennen 14 1 14 1 2 Connection with MicroLogix 1000 series or MicroLogix 1500 14 2 14 2 Initial Settirigs tti oe credi utili esit ves eid e Hn iE Eoi RR ex 14 3 14 2 1 PLE Side setings eec eerte cete ct eterne cete dede tet entere eta 14 3 14 2 2 GOT side settings xd etre ue eeu eR o a t eue eua eue 14 4 14 3 Tr nsmission Specification aeq n d 14 5 14 4 Connection cable ccccccecccceecceeeceeeeneeeeeeeceaceceeneeesneeseaeescaeeceaneesaneeseaeeseaeessaneesaeeseneeseaeeesuneeseneetenees 14 5 15 1 System configurations 2 iata ace ie Rie ne oa eae tee o eua it cea e anat ente 15 1 15 1 1 Connection with JW 21CU or JW 31CUH nennen nnne nnns 15 1 15 1 2 Connection with JW 22CU JW 32CUH or JW 33CUH 15 2 15 1 3 Connection with JW 50CUH
83. fabricating method 5 The connection cable may also be fabricated on user side Refer to Section 21 3 2 for details of the fabricating method 6 The operation panel and cables for I O may also be fabricated on user side Refer to Section 21 3 3 for details of the fabricating method 21 5 21 5 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION 21 3 2 Connection cables 21 6 MELSEC GOT 1 Connection cable for use between external I O unit and user made original operation panel Fabricate the connection cable for use between the external I O unit and user made original operation panel on the user side by referring to the following a Connection diagram External I O unit side Shield Original operation panel side Pin Number Signal Name XDO XD1 XD2 XD3 XD4 XD5 XD6 XSCNO XSON1 XSCN2 XSCN3 XSCN4 XSCN5 XSCN6 XSCN7 Wires for connection of external input power the shield to FG Pin Number Signal Name B4 XDO A4 XD1 B3 XD2 A3 XD3 B2 XD4 A2 XD5 B1 XD6 A1 XD7 B8 XSCNO A8 XSCN1 B7 XSCN2 A7 XSCN3 B6 XSCN4 A6 XSCN5 5 XSCN6 5 XSCN7 A9 YD15 B9 YD14 A10 YD13 B10 YD12 A11 YD11 B11 YD10 A12 YD9 B12 YD8 A13 YD7 B13 YD6 A14 YD5 B14 YD4 A15 YD3 B15 YD2 A16 YD1 B16
84. in the system configurations denote the numbers to 3 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions _ Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance 2 Adapter 3 RS 232C cable 1 0 Changes with the connection target CPU specifications Profibus 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the SIMATIC S7 300 series or SIMATIC S7 400 series Type Application cum Ju e ee Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T 17 SIEMENS PLC connected RS 232C communication A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 GOT 1 2 3 4 A953GOT with built in communication interface 2 HMI adaptor SIEMENS make MLFB 6ES7 972 0 11 0 RS 232C cable between HMI adaptor and GOT Refer to Section 17 3 and fabricate on user side 1 The GOT can monitor the PLC CPU side error information using the alarm list system alarm function Note that when connected with the SIEMENS PLC however it cannot monitor error information Refer to the GT Designer help function for details of the alarm list system alarm function 2 The GOT requires the PLC CPU where the HMI adaptor is connected to be set to Host Refer to Section 17 2 for details of the setting method 8
85. internal device numbers to be read RWwm 1 to RWwn Storage for the setting mentioned above Stores the data to be read from the GOT internal RWrn to RWrn D GOT Master station a a pe for the setting mentioned above IRWin E RWmn F E RWrn c Communication overview When reading data from the GOT internal device GD100 200 and 300 to the remote register RWwm Lower byte Master station gt GOT Master station GOT PLC CPU aster s t 2 4 RWrO 1234H 3 RWrO 1234H FROM lt RWri 0E54H RWr1 OE54H RWr2 0066H RWr2 0066H remote register RWwO RWw1 RWw2 RWw3 2 remote register RWwO RWw1 RWw2 RWw3 GD100 1234H GD200 54 0300 0066H GOT internal device 1 Store the continuous read command data in the master station s remote register RWw 2 Turn on the GOT request flag and read the data in GD100 200 and 300 are read to the remote register RWr by storing the command data in the GOT remote register RWw Command execution The GOT complete flag turns on when the command processing is complete 3 By link scan the read data is stored in the master station s remote register RWr 4 Read the data to the PLC CPU using the FROM instruction etc 9 18 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT d Sequence program exa
86. is not available MNET B Stations 1 to 31 0 master station is not available 2 Mode switch When using the data link set this switch to ONLINE 3 Baud rate switch only for MNET B Set the baud rate to the same level as designated for the master station 6 3 Self diagnosis test Self diagnosis test checks the hardware of the data link unit and for breakage of the link cable By using the mode switch of the data link unit the following three modes can be selected For test procedures and analysis of the results refer to the reference manuals of MELSECNET or MELSECNET B data link system Switch e Description Contents setting Station to station test mode 5 This mode checks the line between 2 stations The station Main station with more recent number is set as the main station and the Station to station test mode one with older number as sub station Sub station 7 This mode checks the hardware including transmission reception circuit by using a single data link unit Self turning test 7 MELSECNET CONNECTION NETWORK SYSTEM MELSEC GOT CHAPTER7 MELSECNET CONNECTION NETWORK SYSTEM 7 1 System configuration 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configuration and connection conditions assume MELSECNET connection network system with the PLC CPU The numbers 1 to 3 given in the system configurations denote the numbers to 3 in 2 S
87. of SW4D5C GOTR PACKE Version F or earlier is used to communicate with the GOT where the basic function OS and PLC communication driver of SW5D5C GOTR PACKE Version A or later have been installed a communication error occurs perform the same operation again A communication error occurs at the first time only 5 The following cautions should be observed when using transparent function a Conditions transparent function will not work The transparent function may not work if the following inoperable conditions are all met and further GX Developer is started with the RS 232C cable connected between the personal computer and GOT However it will work if only one condition has not realized For example it will work when the CPU to be monitored is QCPU Conditions transparent function will not work CPU module to be ACPU Not applicable to QnACPU or monitored QCPU ACSOR2 9SS or AC30R2 9P of Version A or Not to 2 955 b Countermeasures Either of the following countermeasures allows transparent function to work normally 1 Use an RS 232C cable of Version A or later 2 For the cable whose Version is neither A nor later reconnect it after disconnecting c How to verify the cable version The RS 232C cables of Version A or later have the version number inscribed at the upper right of the model name marked on the connector 305 1 0555 2 4 CPU DIRECT CONNECTI
88. parameter CC Link list setting set the first No total number of stations connected remote refresh devices remote register refresh devices and station information setting Setting the items of the following CC Link list setting and CC Link station information makes a GOT communication sequence program unnecessary Setting Screen Example No of boards module 1 7 Boards Blank no setting 0 boards Set by the sequence program Start 1 0 No 0000 Operational settings PLC parameter auto start nea DR EY Online Remote net mode CC Link list setting Ret cout PLC down select Stop Scan mode setting Asynchronous Station information Initial settings Interrupt setting Interrupt settings CC Link station information Module 1 x CC Link station Exclusive station Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word lt Btati Station type count __ station select Send Send Receive Automatic information Intelligent device station Exclusive station 1 No setting 64 64 128 Remote 1 0 station Exclusive station 1 setting 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT Chapter 9 CC Link connection remote device station 9 1 System configuration 1 System configuration and connection conditions The following
89. planning IP address management etc 2 When using the Q series compatible E71 to make 1 1 communication with the GOT through a 10BASE T Cross cable set 6 seconds or more as the send time out period The utility functions can be started by switching power on again after installation of the system programs Operating System communication driver etc into the GOT After the functions have started touch the Setup icon to display the Setup screen and make settings related to Ethernet connection 11 15 11 ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 11 3 Troubleshooting for disabled monitoring The following is the troubleshooting method when the GOT is disabled for monitoring at the time of Ethernet connection Disabled monitoring Does error appear NO when GOT is started NO For corrective action refer to GOT user s Is system alarm displayed manual Has correct communication driver been installed YES Refer to GT Designer help and install correct communication driver Does station NO ina GT Desi d set in Ethernet settings exist rrect setting using x da on Ethernet download project data again s Ethernet communication YES Refer to Ethemet communication unit user s unit mounted properly manual and mount unit properly Are Ethernet settings IP address etc correct ES Refer to Section 11 1 and make proper connection
90. single CC Link system 8 CC LINK CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 1 Monitoring by transient transmission The devices of the PLC CPU on the CC Link system Master local station are specified and monitored By merely specifying the devices to be monitored on the GOT those devices can be monitored without creating the GOT communication sequence program Monitorable GOT communication sequence program Master local station 19 4 IIIA Shielded twisted cable 8 CC LINK CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 2 Monitoring by Cyclic transmission All remote inputs outputs and remote registers assigned to the Master station by CC Link parameter setting can be specified and monitored Not only the area assigned to the GOT in the Master station but also the regions of the other stations can be monitored This section describes the remote inputs remote outputs remote registers write area and remote registers read area separately but all data can be monitored on the same screen Remote inputs Input function area of the GOT GOT A8GT J61BT13 GOT A8GT J61BT13 Station 1 1 station occupied Station 2 4 stations occupied PLC CPU Master station Intelligent device station Intelligent device station Remote inputs RX RXOF to RX00 RX9F to RX90 RXAF to RXAO
91. stations 1 or 4 stations All areas are use areas m and n in the table indicate the addresses assigned to the Master module by station number Addresses O Transfer Direction Number of occupied stations Description Default Value Master station GOT RWwm to RWwm 3 RWwm to RWwm F Usewiteaea GOT Master station RWinto RWrn 3 RWmtoRWmsE Userredaea 0 8 CC LINK CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 8 3 Programming The programming example described in this section is designed to make parameter setting to the master module and communication between the GOT and remote I O station in the following system Refer to the CC Link System Remote I O Module User s Manual Details for the remote I O station and to the CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual Details for details of the parameter setting made to the master module 8 3 1 System configuration PLC QO6HCPU A975GOT A8GT J61BT13 AJ65BTB1 16DT QJ61BT11 Station 0 Station 1 1 station occupied Station 2 1 station occupied CC Link dedicated cable 8 3 2 Relationships between corresponding devices QO6HCPU QU61BT11 A975GOT A8GT J61BT13 AJ65BTB1 16DT Station Station 1 1station occupied Station 1 1station occupied PLC CPU Master station Intelligent device station Remote station M16 to M31 M32 to M47 M48 to M63 M112 to M127 M128 to M143 M144 to M159 Address Remote regis
92. the Ethernet setting using GT Designer and how to set the NW number station number device name and device number 2 3 5 Access range for monitoring when using MELSEC FXCPU other PLC and microcomputer connections Only the connected CPU can be monitored Other stations cannot be monitored 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT Chapter3 Bus connection 3 1 First step in bus connection If the GOT where the basic function OS and the PLC communication driver for QCPU mode bus connection are not installed is bus connected with the QCPU Q mode the QCPU will be reset disabling communications with the QCPU using GX Developer or the like In this case disconnecting the bus connection cable of the GOT cancels the resetting of the QCPU 3 1 1 GOT handling from PLC CPU in bus connection GOT handling as viewed from PLC CPU is described below 1 Connection with QCPU Q mode The PLC CPU recognizes the as a 16 I O point intelligent function module Hence the GOT must be assigned to the empty points of the PLC CPU The GOT occupies one extension stage 16 points 10 slots of the PLC CPU and can be assigned to the occupation location Cannot be assigned to the main extension bases 2 Connection with other than QCPU Q mode The PLC CPU recognizes the as a 32 point special function module Hence the GOT must be assigned to the empty points of the PLC CPU The GOT can be assigned to the location of empty points
93. the Master station Though the GOT cannot enter data value entry function etc into the other remote registers read area it can display data value display function etc 8 CC LINK CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT Remote registers write area Display function area of the GOT GOT A8GT J61BT 13 Station 1 1 station occupied Intelligent device station GOT A8GT J61BT13 Station 2 4 stations occupied PLC CPU Master station Intelligent device station Remote registers RWw RWw0 to RWw3 RWw4 to RWw7 RWw8 to RWwB RWwC to RWwF RWwO to RWw3 RWw4 to RWw7 RWw8 to RWwB RWwC to RWwF RWw0 to RWw3 RWw4 to RWw7 RWw8 to RWwB RWwC to RWwF RWw10 to RWw13 RWw10 to RWw13 RWw10 to RWw13 RWw14 to RWw17 RWw14 to RWw17 RWw14 to RWw17 RWwFC to RWwFF RWwFC to RWwFF RWwFC to RWwFF 1 Store data into the remote registers write area assigned to the Master station by CC Link parameter setting 2 Data is stored into the remote registers write area of the GOT by link scan 3 Display the specified remote registers write area on the GOT Value display function etc PRODUCTION CONDITION LINE 1 115 LINE 2 46 LINE 3 74 8 CC LINK CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 8 2 2 I O Signals Transfered to from the Master module The following table lists the I O signals assigned to the GOT The I O signals di
94. the time check period of GX Developer to shorter than 30 seconds 7 When executing PLC Write to a PLC CPU using the transparent function the writing may be failed due to a cable disconnection or other reasons In the case above retry PLC Write from the personal computer that has failed the PLC Write or reset the PLC CPU 8 If the following GOT functions are used when connecting with a QCPU Q mode an error may occur in a GOT or GX Developer The following lists the errors that may occur and their handling procedures GOT function Error message of GOT Handling on GOT side Eror message of Handling on Sx Developer GX Developer side FILE NOT FOUND 358 File of PLC access failure The message does not appear TC Setting area is empty Cannot Communication Execute ladder read again when PLC Read or PLC Write is not being executed by GX Developer Turn ON the trigger device of the recipe function again when PLC Read or PLC Write is not being executed by GX Developer Execute TC monitor read again when PLC Read or PLC Write is not being executed by GX Developer Execute to read the PC diagnosis monitor screen unit detailed information screen again when PLC Read or PLC Write is not being executed by GX Developer File access failure Please try again File access failure Please try again PLC file system error Unable to communicate with PLC File access failure Please try again
95. there are the following setting items and precautions The explanations in this section will be made for the following System configuration lt 0 71 gt lt GOT gt eel LLL NW 1 1 5 1 3 n g IP address 192 168 0 1 IP address 192 168 0 3 Bi Al Port 5001 Port No 5001 Set as host lt 71 gt N W No 1 2 BB IP address 192 168 0 2 HT Port No 5001 Refer to item 5 in this section for how to set up the Ethernet unit network number of GOT personal computer number IP address and port number When connecting multiple GOTs in the Ethernet network set different PLC No for each GOT Refer to Section 11 2 6 Procedure for communications via QE71 Restrictions Communications cannot be made via the MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET B MELSECNET lI 1 Compatible models Use the QE71 and PLC whose function version is B or later 2 QET1 switch settings Operation mode setting switch 0 online Automatic start SW3 ON When SW3 is ON initial processing is performed independently of Y 19 initial processing request Communications are also enabled if the CPU module is STOPped For the way to perform initial processing using Y19 initial processing request refer to the AJ71QE71 User s
96. year in BCD 2 digits Example Clock data month 18 02 30 Thursday June 10 1999 15108 mem Store month data from 01 to 12 in BCD 2 digits Clock data day Store day data from 01 to 31 in BCD 2 digits Clock data hour 15108 Store hour data from 00 to 23 in BCD 2 digits Clock data minute 15108 Store minute data from 00 to 59 in BCD 2 digits D D D D D D9 Clock data second 28 Clock data day of week 010 2 3 Day of week data 00 Sunday 03 Wednesday 06 Saturday 01 Monday 04 Thursday 02 Tuesday 05 Friday 2 2 2 2 2 6 20 20 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 1 D11 to D12 D13 Interrupt output Write data and lower level 7 bit details are output as interrupt code 0140019 020 to 02031 D2032 to 02034 1 second binary counter D2035 ok mE Counting increases every second after the power is turned on The data is binary D2036 to D2047 1 D indicated in this chapter indicates a virtual device of the GOT and is not the data register of the PLC 2 It can be used only when the A9GT RS T with built in clock element is connected 8 SW4D5C GOTR PACKE version C or later is compatible with second and day of week of the clock data 20 5 Communication commands This section describes commands for communication 20 5 1 Command list Commands used for data transmission between the GOT and the host are shown
97. 0 101 and 102 3points Master station GOT PLC CPU remote register remote register RWwO 0403H RWwO 0403H RWw1 0064H RWw1 0064H 1 TO RWr2 1234H wre 1234H RWr3 0E54H RWr3 OES4H RWr4 0066H RAE 0066 GD100 1234H GD101 54 GD102 0066 GOT internal device 1 Store the continuous write command data in the master station s remote register RWw 2 Turn on the GOT request flag and store the command data in the GOT remote register RWw Store the data in GD100 101 and 102 Command execution The GOT complete flag turns on when the command processing is complete 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION d Sequence program example Always ON FROM HE3 4 48 Initial setting execution program A Enon status flag Command M58 7 ME MOV H0403 0100 MOV H0064 D101 MOV H1234 D102 H MOV HOE54 D103 MOV H0066 D104 HiEoD100 K5 H SET M48 GOT complete flag M48 ON processing complete B RST M148 E Other command execution program E Always ON TO H163 K4M148K1 H MELSEC GOT Remote input RX read Refer to 1 Command data storage Transfers master station RWwO to 4 GOT request flag ON command execution Remote output RY write 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STA
98. 0 CVM1 CPU01 CVM1 CPU11 CVM1 CPU21 CS1 CJ1 12 13 12 2 3 Initializing C200Ha series and 1 12 15 12 2 4 Initializing communication board 12 15 12 2 5 Initializing communication unit 12 16 12 2 6 GOT side settings E E E E E A E E E T 12 16 12 3 Connection cable eiie ee iere Hr 12 17 12 31 R9422 cable enitn tt havoc tsp ft onn eh or Eie a tere Lord 12 17 12 3 2 RS 232C Cable 12 19 12 3 3 Converter and connection cable used 12 21 CHAPTER13 YASKAWA PLC CONNECTION 13 1 to 13 10 13 1 System configurations E A 13 1 13 1 1 Connection with GL60S GL60H or GL70H 13 1 13 1 2 Connection with GL120 or 0 13 2 13 1 3 Connection with CP 92008SH csse eterne teet otn nta aad ana 13 3 13 1 4 Connection with MP 920 MP 930 CP 9300MS CP 9200 H or PROGIC 8 13 4 13 1 5 Connection with GL120 or GL 130 nennen nre 13 5 IKPMUICIEISuI 13 6 13 2 1 PLC side settings oncaeid ennai 13 6 1322 GOT Side Settings 2x x
99. 000 CV2000 CVM1 CPU01 CVM1 CPU11 CVM1 CPU21 CS1 CJ1 5 Communication board CS1W SCB21 CS1W SCB41 6 Communication unit CS1W SCU21 CS1W SCU41 Omron GOT D sub 25 pin male Cab darei T D sub 9 pin female metric screw type able connection and direction of signal inch screw type FG SD TXD RSDRXD 3 SD TXD TR ER 5 ki SG s i DSR DR RTS 8 CTS sa 9 k 12 19 12 19 12 OMRON PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 2 Connector and connector cover Connector for GOT HDEB 9S 05 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD HDE CTH1 4 40 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD Connector for Omron side Use connectors attached to the upper link unit the communication board Communication unit and the CPU 3 Precautions for cable preparation The cable must be 15m 49 18feet or shorter 12 20 12 20 12 OMRON PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 12 3 3 Converter and connection cable used in CQM1 The converters recommended parts for connecting the CQM1 and the GOT and the connection diagram and connectors are as follows 1 Available converter EL LINE II EL Engineering KS 10P System Sacom 2 Connection diagram 1 When using EL LINE II RS 232C RS 422 converter RS232C signal FG TXD RXD RTS 12 21 12 21 12 OMRON PLC CONNECTION
100. 05 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD HDE CTH1 4 40 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD Connector for Yaskawa PLC Use connectors matching the Yaskawa PLC 3 Precautions for cable preparation The maximum cable length depends on the specifications of the Yaskawa PLC For further details refer to the instruction manuals of the Yaskawa PLC 13 10 13 10 14 ALLEN BRADLEY PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT Chapter14 Allen Bradley PLC connection 14 1 System configurations 14 1 1 Connection with SLC500 series 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the SLC500 series The numbers 1 to 4 given the system configurations denote the numbers to 4 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance s 7 Changes with the connection 1 GOT target CPU e specifications Adapte 4 RS 232C cable J 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the SLC500 series Type GOT unit Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT Allen Bradley PLC connected GOT A953GOT _ Adaptor Allen Bradley 1770 RS 232C cable between CPU and G
101. 15 SW16 SW17 SW18 sweat SW22 SW23 SW24 When connecting to A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71C24 R2 Mode switch Transmission specification switch ATSJTIUC24 R2 5 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION MELSEC GOT f When connecting to A1SCPUC24 R2 ATSceuscna MELSEC ATScruzena tan FUN ano P ewe MITSUBISHI 2 e A wsrdsser Mode switch x I n n n Transmission specification d switch q 88 d e g wo q o m 1 gt qj a When cover is open g When connecting to A2CCPUC24 Acccruces Mode switch Station number switch pipea Uggs C5 PERE lt L 1 1852520 T TO Transmission specification switch
102. 3 Display the specified remote outputs on the GOT Lamp display function etc OPERATING STATUS O 8 CC LINK CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT Remote registers read area Input function area of the GOT GOT A8GT J61BT13 GOT A8GT J61BT13 Station 1 1 station occupied Station 2 4 stations occupied PLC CPU Master station Intelligent device station Intelligent device station Remote registers RWr RWr0 to RWr3 RWr0 to RWr3 RWr0 to RWr3 RWr4 to RWr7 RWr4 to RWr7 RWr4 to RWr7 RWr8 to RWrB RWr8 to RWrB RWr8 to RWrB RWrC to RWrF RWrC to RWrF to RWrF RWr10 to RWr13 RWr10 to RWr13 RWr10 to RWr13 RWr14 to RWr17 RWr14 to RWr17 RWr14 to RWr17 to RWrFC to RWrFF RWrFC to RWrFF 1 Store data into the remote registers read area of the GOT Value entry function etc 2 Data is stored by link scan into the remote registers read area assigned to the GOT of the Master station Collected per link scan 3 Read the data of the remote registers read area to the PLC CPU PRODUCTION AMOUNT DIRECTIVE LINE 1 120 LINE 2 50 LINE3 M The GOT can enter data value entry function etc into the remote registers read area assigned to the GOT of
103. 3P SW2SRX GSV22P SW2SRX GSV43P Motion controller CPU SW2SRX GSV51P A series Windows version SW3RN GCV13P SW3RN GSV22P SW3RN GSV43P SW3RN GSV51P Motion controller CRU SW6RNC GSVSET SW6RNC GSVPRO Q series 4 CPU DIRECT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 4 3 2 Instructions for using the transparent function 1 Connect a peripheral device such as a personal computer to the RS 232C interface of the GOT 2 Only one of the bar code function servo amplifier monitor function and transparent function can be used The following table indicates the priorities of the functions High lt Priority Low Bar code function Servo amplifier monitor function Transparent function There is bar code settingin The extended function OS for servo amplifier No setting items the monitor screen data monitor function has been installed in the GOT The transparent function cannot be used when there is bar code setting in the monitor screen data or the extended function OS for servo amplifier monitor function has been installed in the GOT When there is bar code setting delete the setting using GT Designer When the extended function OS for servo amplifier monitor function has been installed delete the extended function OS 3 When connecting the GOT with the QCPU A mode refer to the QCPU A mode User s Manual for the GPP function software package and the startup time type setting PLC type 4 A communication error will occur if GT Designer
104. 3m AC30B R 3m 50 5 connector conversion box AC50B R 5m Connection cable between GOT and oT A8GT C100EXSS 10m A8GT C200EXSS 20m A8GT C300EXSS 30m Connection cable between A8GT C100EXSS 1 10m ABGT C200EXSS 1 20m ABGT C300EXSS 4 30m bus connector conversion box and GOT 4 5 6 Connection cable between A1SC07B 0 7m A1SC12B 1 2m A1SC30B 3m A1SC50B 5m SOT and eo als A8GT C100BS 10m A8GT C200BS 20m A8GT C300BS 30m Connection cable between 9 base unit and GOT A8GT C12NB 1 2m A8GT C30NB 3m A8GT C50NB 5m 1 There are the following differences between the bus connection board and bus connection unit ASGT BUSS U Has one interface and usable with the at termination Unusable with the GOT at midpoint A9GT BUS2S U Has two interfaces and usable with the at termination and the at midpoint 2 A single GOT does not accept multiple bus connection units and bus connection boards 3 Plug the connection cable into the PLC extension only connector 4 When using the bus connection cable ABGT C100EXSS A8GT C200EXSS A8GT C300EXSS connect the connection cable connectors as indicated below Connector COM1 PLC CPU side Connector COM2 GOT side 5 When using the bus connection cable ABGT C100EXSS ABGT C200EXSS A8GT C300EXSS A8GT C100BS A8GT C200BS A8GT C300BS always connect the ground wires green wires 1m coming out of the con
105. 5 GOT A8GT 50KBF Connection cable between GOT and ten key panel 3 4 Connection cable between GOT and operation Connection cable Kanaden Corp make panel 1 2 3 6 Connection cable between GOT and connector terminal A8GT C30TB 3m block conversion unit 3 5 A8GT CO5TK 0 5m Connection cable between connector terminal block conversion unit and general purpose I O equipment Connection cable between connector terminal block conversion unit and ten key panel Connection cable between connector terminal block conversion unit and operation panel 1 6 Refer to Section 21 3 3 and fabricate on user side Refer to ABGT TK Ten Key Panel User s Manual and fabricate on user side Connection cable Kanaden Corp make 1 The operation panels and connection cables made by Kanaden Corp are available from Kanaden Corp Refer to Section 21 3 4 for contact details 2 The operation panel and cable for input only may also be fabricated on user side Refer to Section 21 3 2 for details of the fabricating method 3 12 24VDC power must be supplied for external I O units If power supplied to the external I O unit is lost midway the operation panel will not operate When using the operation panel again supply power to the external unit and then reset the GOT 4 The connection cable may also be fabricated on user side Refer to the ASGT TK Ten Key Panel User s Manual for details of the
106. 5853 3m 7 RS 232C cable between link interface unit and GOT 1 1 The RS 232C cable can be user fabricated Refer to Section 19 3 for details of the fabricating method User fabricated cable 2 19 6 19 6 19 MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC WORKS PLC MELSEC GOT 19 1 7 Connection with FP10SH 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the FP10SH The numbers 1 to 5 given in the system configuration denote the numbers 1 to 5 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance Connected to TOOL port p e 3 RS 232C cable Max 15m nnected to COM port ET b 4 RS 232C cable 1GOT Within 15m Max 15m 3 Link interface unit E 5 RS 232C cable Max 15m 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the FP10SH Image No Application id Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T Matsushita Electric Works A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 PLC connected GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface Link interface unit
107. 61 NET AIC Allen Bradley GOT D sub 9 pin female metric screw type Wd D sub 9 pin female Cable connection and direction of signal inch screw type Allen Bradley D sub 9 pin female metric screw type D sub 9 pin female inch screw type 7 rr 8 2 Connector and connector cover to be used GOT connector HDEB 9S 05 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD HDE CTH1 4 40 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD Connector for Allen Bradley PLC Converter Adapter Use the connector that matches the Allen Bradley PLC Converter Adapter 3 Precautions for preparation of connector The maximum cable length may vary depending on the specification of the Allen Bradley PLC specification For details refer to the Allen Bradley PLC operation manual 14 6 15 SHARP PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT Chapter15 Sharp PLC connection 15 1 System configurations 15 1 1 Connection with JW 21CU or JW 31CUH 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configuration and connection conditions assume connection with the JW 21CU or JW 31CUH The numbers 1 to 3 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 3 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance Chan
108. 7 Servo Amplifier is dnt tete ee E E Gd aden eee nevi e o ve ete eet ies 21 22 21 7 1 System configuration Aer a A 21 22 21 7 2 Initial setting only when RS 422 communication function is 21 23 217 3 C0nnecti mcables s A are oa Eaa reaa aa EE aias 21 23 Appendix 1 System configuration example for microcomputer connection App 1 Appendix 1 1 System configuration App 1 Appendix 1 2 GOT side communication setting and monitor screen setting App 1 Appendix 1 3 Host side sample program App 3 Appendix 1 4 System operation 4 nnn nnne App 3 INDEX Index 1 to Index 2 About Manuals The following manuals related to this product are available Obtain the manuals as required the according to this table e Related manual Manual number Model code GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 Operating Manual Start up Manual Describes how to install GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 into a personal computer and IB 0800143 how to browse the online manuals 1DM183 Found in the packing of the GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 GOT900 Series Operating Manual
109. 8 0 2 Request timed out If ping does not pass through check the cable and unit connections and Windows side IP address and other settings It is also possible to perform the Ping test using GX Developer Version6 SW6D5C GPPW 6 01B or later Refer to the Operating Manual of GX Developer for more details on the Ping test 11 6 11 ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 5 Settings with GT Designer and GOT a Perform the settings of the E71 to be monitored in Ethernet Setting of GT Designer Set the IP address assigned to the E71 to be connected to Set the port number of the E71 to be connected to It has been defined in a sequence program Refer to GT Designer Help function for Ethernet setting Ethernet setting list Host NAW No PLC No Type F address No Communication R oop Delete Close b Set the GOT using Setup of the GOT Refer to Section 11 2 5 for details of the setting 001 15 239 GOT PC 01 17 64 GOT IP ADDRESS 000 000 000 000 GOT PORT No 05001 102465534 ROUTER ADDRESS 000 000 000 000 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 000 SEND MESSAGE WAIT 000 xi0ms 0 300 SEND MESSAGE TIME 03 sec 3 90 START UP TIME 0 0 3 0 255 Page 2 2 T lt SELECT CHANGE 11 7 11 7 11 ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 11 2 2 When using QE71 For communication from GX Developer via the QE7 1
110. 9GT 50WRS2 with built in communication interface Omron PLC connected RS 422 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface Base mount type upper link unit C200H LK201 V1 Base mount type upper link unit C200H LK202 V1 Communication 1 C200HW COMO2 C200HW COMO5 C200HW COMO6 Communication 1 C200HW COMOS C200HW COMO6 RS 422 cable beween CPU and GOT RS 232C cable between upper link unit and GOT RS 232C cable between communication board and GOT RS 422 cable between upper link unit and GOT RS 422 cable between communication board and GOT Refer to Section 12 3 and fabricate on user side 1 The C200HE CPU11 does not accept the communication board Fit the board via the upper link unit 12 4 12 4 12 OMRON PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 12 1 4 Connection with CQM1 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the CQM1 The numbers 1 to 6 given in the system configurations denote the numbers to 5 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Note that the GOT cannot be connected to the CQM1 CPU11 which has no RS 232C interface Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance 232C cable Within 15m
111. B and W other network Station to Network No 1 Network No 2 Data link asn Stati be ation accessed Q Q Mode AnA connected to GOT 1 1 1 2 n 2 1 E 2 3 2 4 a 12 Lo fe fe L Ls Te Tx Tx ERN i X 1 3 2 2 Local Local Local AnU 2 1 GOT 23 AnU 24 x QnA L1 AnA L2 Accessible Accessible within the range for AnA T C 0 to 255 R ER ZR cannot be monitored X Not accessible 2 SPECIFICATION MELSEC GOT POINT For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter make sure to use the local device number if designating devices allocated to other station If not display speed will be reduced Station to Network No 1 Network No 2 Data link system Station be ccessed cennect dto Q Q Mode AnA QnA AnU QnA GOT AnU QnA QnA AnA GOT 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 M L1 L2 1 Other APA H2 1 3 0 Other 2 QnA 2 2 1 Other 1 Local 2 Other 1 0 Local E 2 Other 4 0 Local lt 4 qom oe es oomermjoomro Designating NW number and station number for setting monitor device 1 When monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter at the connected station local station NW
112. BGT C200EXSS 1 20m ABGT C300EXSS 1 30m A8GT C100EXSS 10m A8GT C200EXSS 20m A8GT C300EXSS 30m A8GT C100EXSS 1 10m A8GT C200EXSS 1 20m A8GT C300EXSS 1 30m A1SCO5NB 0 5m A1SCO7NB 0 7m A1SC30NB 3m A1SCO7B 0 7m A1SC12B 1 2m A1SC30B 3m A1SC12B 1 2m A8GT C200BS 20m A1SC30B 3m A8GT C300BS 30m Connect both ground wires to control box or like 6 The A8GT C100EXSS 1 A8GT C200EXSS 1 A8GT C300EXSS 1 cable consists of the A8GT EXCNB 0 5m and A8GT C100BS 10m C200BS 20m C300BS 30m respectively The length of the A8GT EXCNB 0 5m need not be considered when calculating the cable length 3 17 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 3 3 Initial settings 3 3 1 Connection with QCPU mode The GOT can be connected with the QCPU Q mode For bus connection one extension stage 16 points 10 slots must be provided for connection of the GOTs The GOTs are assigned to the I O slots of that extension stage To set the STAGE No and SLOT used set up the utility function of the GOT For full information on the utility function refer to the GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 compatible Extended Option Functions Manual i He s Posey BUZZER OUTSIDE SPEAKER 08 SCREEN SAVE TIME 0 HIN 0 FREE SCREEN SAVE LIGHT OFF QBUS STAGE No Set the STAGE No for connection
113. C cable between TOOL 2 AFC8503 3 port of PLC CPU and GOT RS 232C cable between COM 3 AFC85853 3 port of PLC CPU and GOT 1 1 The RS 232C cable can be user fabricated Refer to Section 19 3 for details of the fabricating method User fabricated cable 2 19 8 19 8 19 MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC WORKS PLC 19 2 Initial settings MELSEC GOT 19 2 1 PLC CPU side settings 19 9 When connecting the GOT and Matsushita Electric Works PLC make the following settings on the PLC CPU side For details of the setting method refer to the manual of the Matsushita Electric Works PLC 1 When connecting to TOOL port of PLC CPU Make the following settings to the connected PLC CPU a When using 16 2 FP1 C24C FP1 C40C FP3 FP10 S FP M C20TC or FP M C32TC Stop bit Pe PT Modem connection No b When using FP2 or FP10SH 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 2 8bit Modem connection No 1 Setting SW1 to ON fixes the transmission speed at 9600bps 2 For the FP10SH set SW1 on the lower side of the operation mode switches When connecting to COM port of PLC CPU Pd Serial port operation selection 1 Computer link 1 This setting cannot be made when the FP10 S is used 2 This setting cannot be made when the FPO C16CT 2 FP1 C24C FP1 C40C FP M C20TO or 2 is used When connecting to link interface unit
114. CPU Switching off the PLC CPU during monitoring will cause a communication error in the GOT When a communication error has occurred switch off the GOT and switch on the PLC CPU and GOT in the method in above 1 3 Precautions for switching off the GOT If the GOT is switched off during monitoring the PLC CPU continues running 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 4 Precautions for system design In the status described in above 3 the GOT does not operate but the PLC CPU power supply module of the main base unit supplies the following consumptive current to the GOT Hence design the system so that the sum of the 5VDC consumptive currents of the modules installed on the main base unit and the GOT consumptive currents does not exceed the 5VDC rated output current 8A of the power supply module Number of GOTs Total Consumptive CPU Connected To Connected Current mA po cum 1275 Connection with QCPU mode Connection with other than QCPU Q mode 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 3 1 4 Restriction when PLC CPU is used in direct method Note that the inputs X of the empty slots cannot be used when the I O control system of the PLC CPU to be connected to is the direct method and a 5m extension cable AC50B R A1SC50NB is used to connect the first GOT and main extension base unit There are no restrictions when the control system is the refresh method When the PLC CPU allows the I O control system to be changed wi
115. CTION MELSEC GOT 21 3 3 Wiring diagrams 1 Wiring diagram for use between external I O unit and connector terminal block conversion unit a For use of AGTBY36 E type connector terminal block conversion unit Connection cable for use between external I O unit and connector terminal block conversion unit External unit side Shield B4 XDO EL 4 XDI 2 1 B2 XD4 A2 XD5 i Bi XD6 Ai XD7 8 XSCNO H A8 XSCN1 H B7 XSCN2 H 7 XSCN3 H B6 XSCN4 H XSCN5 H B5 XSCN6 H Ab XSCN7 H A13 Bi6 YDO H B12 A6TBY36 E 16 YDI i B15 YD2 15 YD3 Bi4 YD4 Ai4 YD5 B13 YD6 A13 YD7 B12 YD8 12 YD9 Bii YD10 11 YD11 i 10 YD12 10 YD13 B9 YDi4 9 YD15 A17 DC12V 24VH B17 DC12V 24VL i A18 DC12V 24VH 18 OV A19 OV 19 Vacant 20 Vacant B20 FG 21 10 21 10 21 OPTIONAL E
116. Connection cable between A0J2HCPU and power supply A0J2CL T unit Connection cable between 4 A9GT J2C10B 1m power supply unit and GOT 1 A single GOT does not accept multiple bus connection units and bus connection boards 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 3 2 5 Connection with motion controller CPU Q172CPU Q173CPU For more information about the system configuration connection conditions and hardware components when connecting with the motion controller CPU Q172CPU Q173CPU via a bus see When Connecting the QCPU Q Mode in Section 3 2 1 3 2 6 Connection with motion controller CPU A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU S3 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume bus connection with the motion controller CPU A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU S3 The numbers 1 to 9 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 1 to 9 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications The system configuration varies with whether or not the PLC extension base unit is used with the motion controller CPU Up to three GOTs may be connected Select the connection cables whose lengths satisfy the conditions of the maximum distance depending on the connection conditions Installing the GOT at a remote location requires the bus connector conversion box 3 a When PLC extens
117. E 3 17 Index 1 5 Sample APP 3 Setting method Allen Bradley PLC connection 14 3 Bus connection 3 17 Computer link connection 5 7 Connection to bar code reader 21 2 Connection to servo amplifiers 21 27 CC Link connection intelligent device station 8 2 CC Link connection remote device station 9 2 CC Link connection via 4 10 2 Ethernet 11 2 HITACHI PEC tne amem 18 3 Matsushita Electric Works PLC 19 9 MELSECNET data link system CONNECTION 6 2 MELSECNET network system COMMOCUON 7 2 Omron PLC 12 9 Sharp PLC connection 15 5 SIEMENS PLC connection 17 2 Toshiba PLC connection 16 1 Yaskawa PLC connection 13 5 System configuration Allen Bradley PLC 14 1 Bus connection 3 4 CC Link connection intelligent device station 8 1 CC Link connection
118. EC GOT 21 5 3 Connection cable The following are the specifications connection diagram and connectors of the cable used to connect the GOT and RGB output type vision sensor 1 Cable specifications Specifications Applicable cable SP23 23352A UL20276 SB or equivalent Applicable cable size 9 core composite cable recommended 2 Connection diagram GOT side 3 Connector and connector cover GOT connector Use the connector matching the following model for the GOT 15 pin D sub male inch screw type Manufactured by DDK 17HE R13150 73MC2 Connector at the vision sensor Use the connector applicable to the vision sensor 4 Precautions for cable preparation Maximum cable length depends on the specifications of the vision sensor Fabricate the cable within the range of the vision sensor specifications 21 19 21 19 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 21 6 Personal computer when RGB screen is displayed 21 6 1 System configuration 1 System configuration The following system configuration assumes connection of a personal computer when RGB screen is displayed The numbers 1 to 2 given in the system configurations denote the numbers to 2 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications 2 Connection 3 cable 2 System equipment The following table indicates the syst
119. GOT Personal computer 4 CPU DIRECT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 5 The function extended board used depends on the type of the FXCPU connected Use the compatible function extended board given in the following table Function Extended Board Used Item When FX1N FX1S series is connected When FX2N series is connected RS 232C communication FX1N 232 BD FX2N 232 BD RS 422 communication FX1N 422 BD FX2N 422 BD 6 The RS 232C cable can also be fabricated by the user Refer to Section 4 2 for details of the fabricating method 4 1 4 Connection with FXCPU FX1 FX2 FX2C series 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume CPU direct connection with the FXCPU FX1 FX2 FX2C series The numbers 1 to 5 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 5 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance 3 RS 422 cable Within 30m Max 30m 3 2 port interface unit 5 RS 422 cable 4 RS 422 cable Within 30 3m lt D eee 30 3m 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the FXCPU FX1 FX2 FX2C series we Type Image No Application GOT unit Serial communication boa
120. GOT Factory set to 0 HOST FF ADDRESS Specify the address of the PLC CPU to which the adapter is connected Factory set to 1 system programs system OS communication driver etc into the GOT After the utility function has started touch the Setup icon to display the setup screen and make settings related to Allen Bradley PLC connection 14 4 14 4 14 ALLEN BRADLEY PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 14 3 Transmission specification Transmission specification for communication between the GOT and the Allen Bradley PLC is as follows 1 When connecting one CPU Item Setting details SLC500 series EVEN Parity bit MicroLogix1000 series NONE MicroLogix1500 series NONE 1 The SLC500 series does not support 38400bps 2 When connecting multiple CPUs 14 4 Connection cable 14 5 The connection diagram and connectors for the RS 232C cables between the CPU SLC500 Series the Converter 1761 NET AIC the Adapter 1770 KF3 and the GOT are as follows 1 Connection diagram 1 CPU SLC500 Series Allen Bradley GOT D sub 9 pin female i disc m D sub 9 pin female able connection and direction of signal inch screw type 1_ oo RD RXD SD TXD BER a nsgi 7 7 RSRTS San se k s 5078 nco 9 9 she 14 5 14 ALLEN BRADLEY PLC CONNECTION 14 6 MELSEC GOT 2 Converter 17
121. GOT and A8GT C50NB 5m A8GT C100EXSS 10m A8GT C200EXSS 20m A8GT C300EXSS 30m bus connector conversion box A8GT C100EXSS 1 10m A8GT C200EXSS 1 20m A8GT C300EXSS 1 30m and GOT 3 4 5 AC12B 1 2m AC12B R 1 2m AC30B R 3m AC50B 5m AC50B R 5m A1SCO7B 0 7m A1SC12B 1 2m A1SC30B 3m Connection cable between A1SC50B 5m A8GT C100BS 10m A8GT C200BS 20m GOT and GOT 4 A8GT C300BS 30m 1 There are the following differences between the bus connection board and bus connection unit A9GT BUSS U _ Has one interface and usable with the GOT at termination Unusable with the GOT at midpoint A9GT BUS2S U Has two interfaces and usable with the GOT at termination and the GOT at midpoint 2 A single GOT does not accept multiple bus connection units and bus connection boards 3 When using the bus connection cable A8GT C100EXSS A8GT C200EXSS A8GT C300EXSS connect the connection cable connectors as indicated below Connector COM1 PLC CPU side Connector COM2 GOT side 4 When using the bus connection cable A8GT C100EXSS A8GT C200EXSS A8GT C300EXSS A8GT C100BS A8GT C200BS A8GT C300BS always connect the ground wires green wires 1m coming out of the connectors at both ends of the cable to the control box or like Connect both ground wires to control box or like 5 The A8GT C100EXSS 1 A8GT C200EXSS 1 A8GT C300EXSS 1 cable consists of the A8GT EXCNB 0 5m
122. GPP A7GPP A7PHP to FXCPU Unit for simultaneous FX 2PIF 1 2 3 FX1N 422 BD FX2N 422 BD 4 5 connection of GOT and peripheral e g GX Developer FX1N 232 BD FX2N 232 BD 4 5 RS 422 cable between FXin 150 1 5 FX9GT CABO 3 0m FX9GT CABO 10M 10 0m 422 BD FX2N 422 BD and RS 422 cable between cable adaptor and GOT AC30R4 25P 3 0m AC100R4 25P 10 0m AC300R4 25P 30 0m RS 232C cable between FX1N 232 BD FX2N 232 BD and AC30R2 9SS 3 0m FX 232CAB 1 3 0m Cable adaptor between FXCPU and RS 422 cable Cable adaptor between FXin FX 422AW0 1 5m 422 BD FX2N 422 BD and RS 422 cable RS 422 cable between FXCPU FX 422CABO 1 5m and 2 port interface unit 1 The FX 2PIF is used to connect the GOT and FXCPU peripheral e g AGGPP AGPHP A7GPP A7PHP simultaneously Refer to the FXCPU manual for the usable models and system configurations for connection of the FXCPU series peripherals 2 When connecting the to the 2 series via the FX 2PIF use the FX 2PIF unit of Ver 3 0 or later 3 The FXtN FX1s and 2 series accepts the function extended board See 4 4 When using the function extended board you can connect one GOT and one peripheral such as GX Developer to the FXCPU and function extended board respectively Function extension board
123. HS series 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the C200HS series The numbers 1 to 6 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 1 to 6 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions 1 2 Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance 3 Base mount type upper link unit 7 E Within 15m C cir 1 GOT E 4 Base mount type upper link unit H 6 RS 422 cable Within 200m Max 200m 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the C200HS series Application o 9 GOT unit Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T m Omron PLC connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 232C communication GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface A985GOT V 97 A960GOT A9GT RS4 Omron PLC connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS4 422 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface Base mount type upper link unit C200H LK201 V1 4 mount type upper link unit C200H LK202 V1 RS 232C cable between upper link unit and GOT Refer to Section 12 3
124. Ho series C200HX C200HG C200HE COMI C1000H C2000H CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 CPU11 CVM1 CPU21 CS1 CJ1 CPU unit Generic term of GL60S GL60H GL70H GL120 GL130 CP 9200SH CP 9300MS MP 920 MP 930 MP 940 CP 9200 H and PROGIC 8 CPU unit Generic term of SLC500 20 SLC500 30 SLC500 40 SLC5 01 SLC5 02 SLC5 03 SLC5 04 SLC5 05 Generic term of 1761 L10BWA 1761 L10BWB 1761 L16AWA 1761 L16BWA 1761 L16BWB 1761 L16BBB 1761 L32AWA 1761 L32BWA 1761 L32BWB 1761 L32BBB 1761 L32AAA 1761 L20AWA 5A 1761 L20BWA 5A 1761 L20BWB 5A Generic term of JW 21CU JW 22CU JW 31CUH JW 32CUH JW 33CUH JW 50CUH JW 70CUH JW 100CUH CPU unit Generic term of H 302 CPU2 03H H 702 CPU2 07H H 1002 CPU2 10H H 2002 CPU2 20H H 4010 CPU3 40H H 300 CPU 03Ha H 700 CPU 07Ha H 2000 CPU 20Ha Generic term of H 200 CPU 02H CPE 02H H 250 CPU21 02H H 252 CPU22 02H H 252B CPU22 02HB H 252C CPU22 02HC CPE22 02HC Generic term of H 20DR H 28DR H 40DR H 64DR H 20DT H 28DT H 40DT H 64DT HL 40DR HL 64DR Generic term of EH CPU104 EH CPU208 EH CPU308 EH CPU316 Generic term of large type series H 200 to 252 Series H Series board type EH 150 Series Generic term of FPO C16CT 2 FP1 C24C FP1 C40C FP2 FP3 FP5 FP10 S FP10SH FP M C20TC and FP M C32TC abbreviation of memory flash memory in the GOT Abbreviation of GOT system software Setting data for dynamic image Personal computer where the corr
125. If this signal is OFF data is not transmitted from the GOT to Normally send signals from the host so that the DSR is always ON DTR signal This signal is turned ON when the GOT is ready to receive data b Connector and connector cover Connector for GOT Connector with cover 17JE 23250 02 D8A6 DDK Connector for host Use a connector matching the host 20 2 20 2 20 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 2 When using RS 232C communication a Connection diagram Host GOT D sub 9 pin female inch screw type Pin No cD RD RXD Cable connection and direction of signal Note The pin numbers for the host in the above diagram are for reference Use pin numbers according to the specification of the host b Connector and connector cover Connector for GOT HDEB 9S 05 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD HDE CTH1 4 40 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD Connector for host Use connectors matching the host 20 3 20 3 20 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 20 2 2 Without connection to DTR The cable connection diagram and the connector without connection to DTR signals are described below 1 When using RS 422 communication a Connection diagram us si kn ix Cable connection and direction of signal metric screw RDA b Connector and connector cover Connector for GOT Connector with cover 17JE 23250 02 D8A6 DDK Connector for hos
126. K CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION 9 1 to 9 38 9 1 System configuration s itt eee n e e ER ee 9 1 9 2 Monitoring enne nnns 9 2 9 2 1 Monitoring Overview 9 2 9 2 2 I O Signals to the Master Module 9 7 9 2 3 Remote Register Allocation 9 11 9 2 4 Command List for the Dedicated Command Monitor 9 12 9 2 5 Details of Each innsir atsan nren nre 9 13 9 3 Sequence Program 9 31 9 3 1 Sequence Program Example When Monitoring Using the Normal Monitor Method 9 31 9 3 2 Sequence Program Example When Monitoring Using Dedicated Command Monitor Method 9 35 CHAPTER10 CC LINK CONNECTION VIA G4 10 1to 10 2 10 1 System COnfIgUratiOn e ode tee bet leek dias 10 1 10 2 eti ete eie etude T eni tu ee deb nx 10 2 CHAPTER11 ETHERNET CONNECTION 11 1to 11 16 11 1 System configUratiorn catt ics cen ved rc cot e Ic ce save e ic ec a e anon c ceo d 11 2 11 2 How to set up the Ethernet connection nnne 11 3 11 2 1 When using ee needed ep et de ete det dee
127. LOCKS 7 8 9 No ObjectFunctiontoBeSet Setting Operation Settings made for the remote station to display on the GOT the line operating statuses ON OFF stored in MO to Settings made to display on the GOT the 5 j 6 Lamp display function Monitor device Y1 RY1 from M113 fault occurrence information output to the Lamp display function Monitor device Y2 RY2 from M114 remote station 7 Touch key function Screen switching device Fixed at 1 Setting made to switch to base screen No 1 Touch key function creen switching device Fixed at 3 Setting made to switch to base screen No 3 9 Touch key function creen switching device Fixed at 4 Setting made to switch to base screen No 4 8 CC LINK CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 4 Base screen No 3 settings The devices of the master station assigned to the GOT intelligent device station are monitored Monitor using cyclic transmission PRODUCTION CONDITION OF BLOCK A LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE 3 ouwmv 1 2 3 quantity 4 5 6 7 8 TROUBLE EMERGENCY OCCURRENCE LINE OTHER MAIN CONDITION BLOCKS 9 10 11 No Object Function to Be Set Setting Numerical input function Write device Wr4 to D204 Settings made to store the values entered Numerical input f
128. LSEC GOT 5 1 5 Connection with ACPU large type 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume computer link connection with the ACPU large type The numbers 1 to 6 given in the system configurations denote the numbers to 6 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions _ Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance 3 Computer link unit LL DY B RS 232C cable Max 15m 4 4 Computer link unit i 2 Within 200m Wu R 200 gt l 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the ACPU large type A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T Computer link connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 232C communication GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS4 Computer link connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS4 422 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface Computer link unit 1 AJ71UC24 Computer link unit 1 2 AJ71UC24 AJ71C24 S8 RS 232C cable between computer link unit and GOT Refer to Section 5 4 and fabricate on user side RS 422 cable between computer link unit and GOT 1 For the syste
129. MITSUBISHI GOT A900 Series User s Manual GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 compatible Connection System Manual perm s Operation Termi VOO series MITSUBISHI Graphic Operation Terminal e SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Always read these instructions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product For the safety instructions of the programmable controller system please read the CPU module user s manual In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION a ES l Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions D DANGER resulting in death or severe injury 1 A CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions x resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user Design Instructions lt gt DANGER e Some failures of the GOT main unit communication module communicati
130. Manual and create an initial processing program 11 8 11 8 11 ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 3 Parameter setting Setting with GX Developer On the MELSECNET Ethernet network parameter setting screen set the network type starting I O No network No group No station number and IP address Setting Screen Examples Module No 1 Module No 2 v Ethemet Network type Start No Network No Total stations Group No Ethernet Parameters Station Na IP addressDEC IP Address Input format DEC Y IP address 192 168 0 1 OK Cancel IP Address Setting 4 Communications check Refer to Section 11 2 1 4 for communications check 11 9 11 9 11 ETHERNET CONNECTION 11 10 MELSEC GOT 5 Settings with GT Designer and GOT a Perform the settings of the QE71 to be monitored in Ethernet Setting of GT Designer Set the IP address assigned to the QE71 to be connected to Refer to GT Designer Help function for Ethernet setting Ethernet setting list x Host E PLC No Type IP address TI T T T T T Port No Communication Set to Host b GOT using Setup of the Refer to Section 11 2 5 for details of the setting GOT N 001 17 239 GOT 01 17 64 GOT IP ADDRESS 000 000 000 000 GOT PORT No 05001 102465534 ROUTER ADDRESS 000 000 000 000 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 000
131. NECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 9 2 4 Command List for the Dedicated Command Monitor Method The command list for the dedicated command monitor is shown below Reference Section Initial setting command when monitoring with dedicated Initial setting command monitor method monitoring is performed using Section 9 2 5 1 the GOT internal device Command to read the specified number of points of data from the specified head GOT internal device to the remote Continuous read register Section 9 2 5 2 Maximum read points When the number of stations is set to 4 stations 14 points When the number of stations is set to 2 stations 6 points Command to read data from several different GOT internal devices to the remote register Random read Maximum read points Section 9 2 5 3 When the number of stations is set to 4 stations 14 points When the number of stations is set to 2 stations 6 points Command to write specified number of points of data from the remote register to the specified head GOT internal de Continuous write a Section 9 2 5 4 Maximum write points When the number of stations is set to 4 stations 14 points When the number of stations is set to 2 stations 6 points Command to write remote register data to several different GOT internal devices Random write Maximum write points Section 9 2 5 5 When the number of stations is set to 4 stations 7 points When the number of stations is set to 2 stations 3 point
132. ON MELSEC GOT 6 The following cautions items should be observed if the monitor conditions are set by GX Developer a The GOT monitor will stop b Operation by a touch switch or input by the numerical ASCII input function cannot be performed c 315 Device write error is displayed in the display field of the alarm list Execute ladder read with the ladder monitor function Execute device value read write by specifying the file register name of the recipe function Execute TC monitor read with the system monitor function Execute to read the PC diagnosis monitor screen unit detailed information screen with the special unit monitor function display system alarm function d Do not perform any operation that requires GOT restarting downloading project data changing utility or others while setting a monitor condition If any operation above is performed a system alarm of 402 Communication timeout may be displayed on restarting the GOT In the case that a registered monitor condition for a PLC CPU cannot be canceled reconnect the GX Developer to the PLC CPU to cancel the monitor condition setting An error may occur on canceling a monitor condition setting e If the time check period of GX Developer is set to 30 seconds or longer in the monitor condition setting 402 Communication time out is displayed in the display field of the alarm list display system alarm function In this case change
133. OT 1 RS 422 cable a Connection diagram GOT D sub 25 pin male Cable connection and direction of signal metric screw type Pin No SDA Computer link unit 68 SG shield b Connector crimp terminal and cable Connector with cover 17JE 23250 02 D8A6 Round type crimp terminal 2 1 25 4 Nippon Crimping recommended part id piedi gis 20 core shield cable 3 RF VV SB 1SB 24x20 Toyokuni Power Cables recommended part c Precautions for cable preparation The maximum cable length depends on the PLC CPU connected Fabricate the cable within the following maximum cable length PLC CPU Connected to Maximum Cable Length m QCPU Q mode 1200 QCPU A mode QnACPU ACPU 200 When using 2 and 3 in the above table for preparing the cable If one electric wire is used the wire may come off the crimp terminal Therefore connect 2 wires as described in connection diagram 1 6 MELSECNET CONNECTION DATA LINK SYSTEM MELSEC GOT CHAPTER6 MELSECNET CONNECTION DATA LINK SYSTEM 6 1 System configuration 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume MELSECNET connection data link system with the PLC CPU The numbers 4 to 3 given in the system configurations denote the numbers to 3 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the
134. OT RS 232C cable between adaptor and GOT Refer to Section 14 4 and fabricate on user side 14 1 14 1 14 ALLEN BRADLEY PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 14 1 2 Connection with MicroLogix 1000 series or MicroLogix 1500 series 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the MicroLogix 1000 series or MicroLogix 1500 series The numbers 1 to 6 given in the system configurations denote the numbers Et to 5 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications System Configuration connected distance e RS 232C cable Changes with the connection DH485 network 1 4 target CPU FS specifications 2 stem equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the MicroLogix 1000 series or MicroLogix 1500 series Type GOT unit Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T Allen Bradley PLC connected RS 232C communication A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface Converter Allen Bradley make 1761 NET AIC Adaptor Allen Bradley make 1770 RS S 232C cable between CPU 1761 CBL AMOO and converter RS 232C cable between 1761 CBL ACOO C converter and GOT 1 RS 232C cable between 6 Refer to Se
135. OT A960GOT A9GT RS4 Hitachi PLC connected RS A9GT 50WRS4 422 communication GOT with built in communication interface Link interface unit COMM 2H RS 232C cable between CPU and GOT RS 232C cable between link interface unit and GOT Refer to Section 18 3 and fabricate on user side RS 422 cable between link interface unit and GOT 18 HITACHI PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 18 1 2 Connection with H 200 to 252 series H series board type or EH 150 series 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configuration and connection conditions assume connection with the H 200 to 252 series H series board type or EH 150 series The numbers 1 to 6 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 6 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance 2 RS 232C cable 1 GOT Within 15m i Max 15m 1 When plugging the connection cable into the 200 to 252 series connect it to the peripheral port of the CPU module 2 When plugging the connection cable into the EH 150 series connect it to the serial port of the CPU module 3 Plugging the connection cable into the serial port 2 of the H252C CPU22 02HC CPE22 02HC requires the round connector 8 pins D sub connector 15 pins conversion cable Hitachi
136. OT internal device registered for monitoring is always read to the remote register Refer to a when executing the monitor registration command ON L Command processing HCommand processing Command processing Command processing Processes to always read the data in the GOT internal device specified in the remote register GOT monitor request flag Monitor request command d GOT always write request flag RY n 3 2 RY n 7 2 When the GOT always write request flag is on the remote device data is always written to the GOT internal device which has been registered for write Refer to a when executing the always write register command Command processing Command processing HCommand processing gt command processing Processes to always read the remote register data to the specified GOT internal device ON GOT always write request flag GOT write request command e Error status flag RX n 3 A RX n 7 A and error reset request flag RY n 3 A RY n 7 A If an error occurs during execution of a command when communicating with the GOT internal device the error status flag turns on The error status flag is turned off by turning on the error reset request flag ON Error status flag ON Error reset request flag POINT The error status flag turns ON if the executed dedicated command is wrong or the preset device cannot be monitored the device is outside the monitor enabled range f
137. PLC Link interface unit HITACHI GOT D sub 15 pin male metric e D sub 9 female inch Cable connection and direction of signal screw type screw type 18 6 18 6 18 HITACHI PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT HITACHI GOT D sub 15 pin male metric D sub 9 pin female inch Cable connection and direction of signal screw type screw type 5 SG 6 DSRDH 8 cscs ECT ee 2 Connector and connector cover Connector for GOT HDEB 9S 05 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD 1 4 40 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD Connector for HITACHI PLC Link interface unit Use connectors attached to the HITACHI PLC and the Link interface unit 3 Precautions for cable preparation The cable must be 15m 49 18feet or shorter 18 7 18 7 19 MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC WORKS PLC MELSEC GOT Chapter 19 Matsushita Electric Works PLC 19 1 System configurations 19 1 1 Connection with FPO C16CT or FPO C32CT 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the FPO C16CT or 2 The numbers 1 to 3 given in the system configuration denote the numbers 1 to 3 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Conditions System Configuration connected distance Connected to TOOL port e RS 232C
138. PLC connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRSA 422 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface Refer to Section 16 3 and fabricate on user side RS 232 cable between CPU and GOT RS 422 cable between CPU and GOT 16 1 16 1 16 16 TOSHIBA PLC CONNECTION 16 2 Initial settings MELSEC GOT 16 2 1 Switch settings of the T2 series T2 PU224 T2E T2N When using the T2 series make the following switch settings 1 Operation mode setting switches T2 PU224 T2E T2N Set the switches as follows OFF ON 1 2 3 4 Set switches 4 5 to OFF 5 computer link 6 2 DIP switch on module board T2N only When using the T2N move the DIP switch No 1 on the T2NCPU module board to select the communication system DIP Switch No 1 Communication system 55465 95422 16 2 2 PLC side settings 16 2 For monitoring by connection to the GOT the following transmission parameters must be set to the Toshiba PLC using the peripheral software For details of how to make this setting refer to the instruction manual of the Toshiba PLC 16 TOSHIBA PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 16 3 Connection cable 16 3 1 RS 422 cable 1 Connection diagram a T3 H T2 PU224 type model3000 S3 Toshiba PLC side GOT side D sub 15 pin male millimeter D sub 25 pin male millimeter Cable conn
139. QUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT b For use of AGTBY54 E type connector terminal block conversion unit Connection cable for use between external I O unit and connector terminal block conversion unit External unit Shield L C H 4 E 6 E 5 E ov bel tis Is Ee 7T IST ter ey ed XDO Ll B20 A4 XD1 20 B3 XD2 XD3 19 B2 L B18 A2 XD5 L A18 Bi XD6 LI B17 A1 XD7 A17 B8 XSCNO H L B16 A8 XSCN1 H L1 16 B7 XSCN2 H L B15 A7 XSCN3 H L A15 B6 XSCM4 H B14 XSCN5 H L A14 B5 XSCN6 H L B13 A5 XSCN7 H L A13 B16 YDO L B12 A6TBY54 E 16 YD1 L A12 B15 YD TBT A15 YD3 A11 B14 YD4 B10 14 YD5 LI A10 B13 YD6 B9 A13 YD7 TAQ B12 YD8 L B8 Ai2 YD9 LI A8 Bi1 YD10 H B7 AM YD H B10 YD12 H L1 B6 A10 YDi3 H L A6 B9 YDi4 H TBS A9 YD15 H L A5 17 DC12 24V H B4 B17 DC12 24V Hi 4 A18 DC12 24V H L1 B3 Bi8 ov H 9 OV E 2 19 Vacant A2 20 Vacant Bi B20 FG
140. R ADDRESS HOST FF ADDRESS M ERE LONG ON 0 FREE ON Ass A 19200 T CHANGE 01 1 81 al 0 1 2 1 31 Page 1 2 T 9 SELECT CHANGE POINT Baud rate Set the transmission speed between GOT and SIEMENS PLC Factory set to 19200bps ADAPTER ADDRESS Specify the 1 address on PROFIBUS assigned to the HMI adapter connected to the GOT Factory set to 1 HOST FF ADDRESS Specify the 1 address of the PLC CPU to which the HMI adapter is connected Factory set to 2 The utility function can be started by switching power on again after installing the system programs system OS communication driver etc into the GOT After the utility function has started touch the Setup icon to display the setup screen and make settings related to SIEMENS PLC connection 17 2 17 2 17 SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 17 3 Connection cable The following connection diagram and connectors are used to connect the HMI adapter and GOT 1 Connection diagram HMI adapter side GOT D sub 9 pin male TODA D sub 9 pin female Cable connection and direction of signal inch screw type inch screw type 2 Connector and connector cover Connector for GOT HDEB 9S 05 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD HDE CTH1 4 40 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD Connector for HMI adapter side Use the connector compatible with the HMI adapter 3 Precaution
141. R4 A1SJ71C24 R4 RS 232C cable between computer link unit and GOT Refer to Section 5 4 and fabricate on user side RS 422 cable between computer link unit and GOT 1 For the system configuration on the serial communication unit side refer to the user s manual of the serial communication unit used 2 When the A1SJ71C24 R2 or A1SJ71C24 R4 is used and the connection target PLC CPU is the AnUCPU the monitorable access range is the range of the AnACPU 5 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 5 2 Initial settings 5 2 1 PLC CPU side settings When connecting the GOT and the computer link unit and serial communication unit and modem interface unit for monitoring set the switches of the computer link unit and serial communication unit as follows The settings vary with the communication status RS 232C communication RS 422 communication of the GOT used Refer to the manuals of the used units for details of the computer link unit serial communication unit and modem interface unit side settings 1 When RS 232C communication is made on GOT a When connecting to QJ71C24 R2 QU71CMO Switch setting for the module is not required Monitoring is available without making switch setting in the assignment setting of GX Developer The following settings are also available for monitoring according to the CH interface of the module to be connected with GOT However when the GOT is connected with the QJ71CMO on
142. RS 422 serial communication board mail 4 eA QnACPU ACPU large small Computer link connection Refer to Chapter 5 Serial communication unit c QCPU mode QnACPU RS 232C serial communication board A9GT RSZ T Refer to Chapter 6 Computer link unit LTD A985GOT QCPU A mode RS 422 serial communication board 4 ACPU A97 GOT A9GT RS4 P lee e A960GOT y MELSECNET II B connection y Data link unit Data link unit VA ATGT J71AP23 optical loop connection a A7GT J71AR23 coaxial loop connection 20595 Masterstation A7GT J71AT23B twisted pair loop connection MELSECNET 10 connection Refer to Chapter 7 Network unit Network unit Y A7GT J71LP23 optical loop connection Li sa Control station esee CH Normal station ES A7GT J71BR13 coaxial loop connection CC Link connection Refer to Chapters 8 to 10 Intelligent device unit A8GT J61BT13 i Remote device unit A8GT J61BT15 5 422 serial communication board GPP function peripheral LB A9GT RS4 _ RE connection unit j Ag N AJ65BT G4 S3 Ethernet connection _ Refer to Chapter 11 Ethernet unit Ethernet communication unit A9GT J71E71 T Refer to Chapter 20 Master local unit Master Local station
143. Remote output YO to Y7FF 2 SPECIFICATION MELSEC GOT 3 When using CC Link connection intelligent device station a Access range Master station local station can be monitored By setting CC Link parameter all devices RX RY RWw and RWr that are allocated to the master station can be monitored When the monitor target is the multi PLC system CPU No 1 to No 4 can be monitored b Setting NW number and station number POINT For monitoring devices 1 When monitoring devices RX RY RWw and RWr that are allocated to the RX RY RWw and RWr 9 gd ee OT d are allocated that are allocated master station by setting CC Link parameter by setting CC Link parameter i make sure to use the local NW number 0 PLC station number Local device number if MK designating devices 2 When monitoring PLC CPU devices of other station allocated to other station If not display speed will NW number 0 PLC station number Other Station number n be reduced n Station number of other station you want to monitor 0 Master station 1 64 Local station c Setting device name and device number 1 Monitoring devices RX RY RWw and RWr that are allocated by setting CC Link parameter Use the following device names For devices RX RY RWw and RWr designate the addresses allocated by station number setting Device name to set by Device to be monitored Device setting range GT Desig
144. TION MELSEC GOT 5 Random write command a Random write command This is a command to write remote register data to several different GOT internal devices b Command format Transfer Direction Write data RWwm Higher byte 5 Random write setting When the occupied points are 2 stations 1 to 3 Points to be written to the GOT internal device When the occupied points are 4 stations 1 to 7 Points to be written to the GOT internal device 0 to 1023 GOT internal device numbers to be RWwm Lower byte Stores the data to be written to the GOT internal device described above Stores the data to be written and GOT internal device RWwm 3 to RWwn E ira numbers for the setting points like mentioned above GOT Master station_ RWm to RWm F Pe c Communication overview When writing remote register data to the GOT internal device GD100 200 and 300 3points M i GOT PLC CPU aster station remote register remote register RWwO 0503H RWwO 0503H RWw1 0064H RWw1 0064H RWw2 1234H RWw2 1234H 1 2 L RWw3 00C8H L RWws 00C8H RWr4 54 RWr4 0E54H RWr5 012CH RWr5 012CH RWr6 0066 RWr6 0066H GD100 1234H GD200 OE54H GD300 0066H GOT internal device 1 Store the random write command data in the master station s remote register RWw 2 Turn on the GOT request flag
145. U devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored Other local stations cannot be monitored c If connected to the master station on the third layer The master station on the second layer and local stations on the third layer can be monitored If the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored Local stations on the second layer cannot be monitored 2 MELSECNET B connection and MELSECNET II connection The GOT is regarded as a local station and can monitor only the master station If the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored Local devices cannot be monitored When setting the monitor device designate the NW number and the station number as follows When monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter NW number 0 Station number Local When monitoring devices other than B and W of the master station NW number 0 Station number Others Station number 0 POINT For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter make sure to use the local device number if designating devices allocated to other station If not display speed will be reduced 2 SPECIFICATION MELSEC GOT 3 Monitoring devices of other station
146. U side serial communication computer link module or PLC CPU with computer link function The RS 232C cable the RS 422 cable connection diagram connector and others are indicated below 1 RS 232C Cable a Connection diagram 1 PLC CPU side DTR ER DSRDR 6 PLC CPU side connector of D sub 9 pins QJ71C24 R2 A1SJ71QC24 R2 A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71C24 R2 A1SCPUC24 R2 A2CCPUC24 GOT D sub 9 pin female inch screw type Cable connection and direction of signal RD RXD SD TXD DTR ER 5 6 DSR R CS CTS 1 If monitoring is hindered by external noise A1SJ71QC24 R2 connection connect each cable for signals other than SG and FG together with the cable for SG sD RD A 7 SD RD 7 DTR DSR 7 DSR DTR BG SG 2 PLC CPU side connector of D sub 25 pins PLC CPU side AJ71QC24 R2 AJ71UC24 GOT D sub 9 pin female inch screw type Signal name Cable connection and direction of signal MPUTER 5 COMPU LINK CONNECTION MELSEC GOT b Connector and connector cover GOT connector HDEB 9S 05 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD HDE CTH1 4 40 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD Connector of Computer link unit Refer to the user s manual of the computer link unit c Precautions for cable preparation The cable must be 15 m 49 21 feet or shorter 5 COMPUTER CONNECTION MELSEC G
147. Use the connector that matches the Sharp PLC 3 Precautions for preparation of connector The maximum cable length may vary depending on the specification of the Sharp PLC specification For details refer to the Sharp PLC operation manual 15 9 15 9 16 TOSHIBA PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT Chapter16 Toshiba PLC connection 16 1 System configuration 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configuration and connection conditions assume connection with the PROSEC T series or PROSEC V series The numbers 1 to 4 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 4 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance RS 232C cable Within 15m Max 15m RS 422 cable Within 1000m Max 1000m 1 RS232C communication can be made with the T2E and T2N only 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the PROSEC T series or PROSEC V series 16 Type Application ee GOT unit Serial communication board V A97 GOT A960GOT 9 52 A9GT RS2T Toshiba PLC connected RS As A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 232C commination GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS4 Toshiba
148. When starting the system switching power on first power on all PLC CPUS then power on the GOT If you power on the PLC CPUS later you need to restart the GOT 4 If you power off the other station PLC CPU PLC CPU where the HMI adaptor is not connected during system operation the GOT will stop monitoring The GOT will not resume monitoring if you power on the PLC CPU again To resume the monitoring of the GOT you must restart the GOT 17 1 17 1 17 SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION 17 2 Initial settings MELSEC GOT When connecting the and SIEMENS PLC you need to make the following settings on Setup of the GOT s utility function Baud rate Set the transmission speed between GOT and SIEMENS PLC Factory set to 19200bps ADAPTER ADDRESS Specify the MPI address on PROFIBUS assigned to the HMI adapter connected to the GOT Factory set to 1 HOST FF ADDRESS Specify the MPI address on PROFIBUS assigned to the PLC CPU to which the HMI adapter is connected The specified PLC CPU is the host when monitor device setting is made on the drawing software For details of monitor device setting refer to the help function of GT Designer Factory set to 2 For details of the utility function refer to the GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 Compatible Extended Option Function Manual OUTSIDE SPEAKER SCREEN SAVE TIME SCREEN SAVE LIGHT LANGUAGE Baud rate ADAPTE
149. ___ NW number Station number Example 6 When using CC Link connection intelligent device station CC Link connection via G4 Image of CC Link Conection CC Link Master Network Unit Unit 0 station 1 2 b df ad iz b Station Ud QnA Q Q Mode AnA AnN poor 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 eae ox AnA 1 3 O Accessible AnN 1 4 x x X Not accessible 2 14 2 14 2 SPECIFICATION MELSEC GOT 2 3 3 CC Link system access range for monitoring 1 When using Bus connection CPU direct connection computer link connection Only connected stations can be monitored 2 When using CC link connection remote device station a Access range Devices RX RY RWw RWr for which the GOT is allocated to the master station by setting the CC Link parameter and the internal device of the GOT can be monitored Other devices RX RY RWw RWr allocated to the master station cannot be monitored 6 Designating NW number and station number Be sure to designate as follows NW number 0 Station number Local c Designating device name and device number Use the following device names For devices RX RY RWw and RWr designate the addresses allocated by station number setting Device name to be set by Device to be monitored Device setting range GT Designer Remote input to X7FF
150. access range for monitoring sse 2 15 2 3 4 Access range for monitoring when using Ethernet connection 1 2 17 2 3 5 Access range for monitoring when using MELSEC FXCPU other PLC and microcomputer connections 2 17 3 1 First step in bus 4 3 1 3 1 1 GOT handling from PLC CPU in bus 3 1 3 1 2 Restriction on the number of GOTs by the PLC CPU connected 3 1 3 1 3 Power supply of PLC CPU and enne enne nnns 3 2 3 1 4 Restriction when PLC CPU is used in direct method ssssseeeenen 3 4 3 1 5 Precautions for use of ATSJCPU and 15 1 3 4 3 1 6 Precautions for GOT connection in duplex system 3 4 3 2 System config rations oiii eno ge t e d eoe Foe cL e do e doe Fa e dere a Fe ta d 3 5 3 2 1 Connection with QCPU 1 sss ren rennen ennemi 3 5 3 2 2 Connection with QnACPU large type or ACPU large type 3 8 3 2 3 Connection with QnACPU small type or ACPU small type 3 10 3 2 4 Connection withi A0J2 HI CPU i
151. ad command RR Random read command details are shown below s Max 262 bytes 1 byte 1 byte S y 2bytes 4x 1 to 64 bytes gt 2 byte STX Address 1 Address 2 Address Sum 2x check ROR _ 099 Error 19 1 Sum check range Normal end Max 260 bytes byte 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 1 byte 2 s Sum check range Example of use When 0100 026 and 0163 are read from the virtual device D26 3D21H c D100 3604H D163 O8ABH Transmission from host to GOT Details of D100 Transmission from GOT to host 20 13 20 13 20 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 20 5 7 Random write command RW Random write command details are shown below Max 518 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes Address 1 8 x 1 to 64 bytes Address 2 Address n P as eee vx Sum check range Norma end 06 15 Example of use When 8BH is written into and 44H is written into D100 of the GOT virtual device STX W D30 Data of D30 D100 Data of D100 ETX Sum check oe 00 Blo 1 001 00 4 4 D 2 Transmission from
152. ad data2 Operating ead data command data Read data3 Operating command data Read data 1 Set the operation specification data with GOT Touch switch function and numeric value input function Write the data such as operation command data from GOT to the GOT internal device Using the sequence program store the read command data to the remote register RWw When the GOT request flag is turned on the read com mand Planned quantly selling data is stored in the GOT remote register RWw Line2 Line3 Line4 and the data in the specified GOT internal device is read to 100 7 o the remote device RWr 250 50 0 By link scan the data is stored in the remote device RWr 300 0 0 of the GOT allocated to the master station Using the sequence program read the remote device RWr data to the PLC CPU Repeat the above steps and execute the read commands then read several information to the PLC CPU 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 9 2 2 I O Signals to the Master Module 1 List of I O signals The I O signal allocation is shown below The I O signals varies depending on the set number of occupied stations 2 st
153. ame Pin No 2 GOT D sub 9 pin male D sub 25 pin male metric screw type Cable connection and direction of signal metric screw type SDASDB 1 BERE CUN Note that the signal names of poles A and B are opposite between the GOT and Omron PLC 12 17 12 17 12 OMRON PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 2 Connector and connector cover Connector for GOT Connector with cover 17JE 23250 02 D8A6 DDK Connector for Omron Use connectors attached to the upper link unit the communication board unit and the CPU 3 Precautions for cable preparation The cable must be 200m 655 74feet or shorter 12 18 12 18 12 OMRON PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 12 3 2 RS 232C cable The connection diagram and connectors for the RS 232C cables between the upper link unit the communication board unit the CPU and the GOT are as follows 1 Connection diagram 1 Upper link unit C200H LK201 V1 C500 LK201 V1 Omron GOT D sub 25 pin male Cab T D sub 9 pin female metric screw type able connection and direction of signal inch screw type Signal name 2 CPU C200Ha series 3 Communication board C200HW COMO2 C200HW COMO05 C200HW COMO6 D sub 25 pin male Cab D dico D sub 9 pin female metric screw type able connection and direction of signal inch screw type 1 i 2 RD RXD 3 6 3 4 4 DTR ER 4 CPU CV500 CV1
154. and fabricate on user side RS 422 cable between upper link unit and GOT 12 2 12 2 12 OMRON PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 12 1 3 Connection with C200Ha series 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the 200 series The numbers to 8 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 8 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance 7 RS 232C cable C le Max 15m Within 15m e j 7 RS 232C cable e Q le Max 15m 5 board RS 232C cable C 15 4 Base mount type upper link unit RS 422 cable Max 200m Within 200m 6 board RS 422 cable Max 200m 12 3 12 3 12 OMRON PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the C200Ha series Application Type mage o g GOT unit Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T po Omron PLC connected RS A956WGOT A
155. and store the command data in the GOT remote register RWw Store the write data in GD100 200 and 300 Command execution The GOT complete flag turns on when the command processing is complete 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT d Sequence program example Always ON FROM Ho K4M48 Ki Remote input RX read Initial setting execution program Refer to 1 ONT Enon status flag Command M58 0100 Ho064 0101 H1234 0102 H00C8 D103 H Command data storage 4 D104 H Hoi2C D105 H Hoose D106 H Transfers master station Dio K7 nwwoto6 148 request flag ON command execution SET GOT complete flag M48 ON processing complete PS SS SSS iS SS eS Sa SS ap Thy ye a Seek A MS AS RANA AA En AS A e Always H Remote output RY write 9 23 9 23 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 6 Monitor register command a Monitor register command This is a command to always register the device number of the GOT internal device which reads the remote register After executing the monitor register command always execute the monitor request command b Command format Transfer Direction Write data RWwm Higher byte 6 Monitor register setting Whe
156. anies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion GOT A900 Series User s Manual GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 compatible Connection System Manual MODEL SW5 GOTR U CON E pos 1DM189 SH NA 0801 19 L 0601 MEE s MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
157. ard memory card Flash PC card Compact flash PC card Memory board Attachment Ten key Panel A7GT CNB A9GT QCNB External I O unit Printer interface unit Memory card interface unit Video RGB mixed input interface unit Video input interface unit RGB input interface unit GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 GT Designer GT Simulator GT Converter GT Debugger GT Manager GT SoftGOT GX Developer GX Simulator Ethernet communication unit Generic term of A985GOT TBA V A985GOT TBD V Generic term of A9B5GOT TBA A985GOT TBD A985GOT TBA EU term of A985GOT TBA A985GOT TBD and A985GOT TBA EU TT SoU E ASOT TER UNUM term of A9 5GOT TBA B A975GOT TBD B A975GOT TBA A975GOT TBD and A975GOT TBA EU Generic term of A970GOT TBA B A970GOT TBD B A970GOT TBA A970GOT TBD A970GOT SBA A970GOT SBD A970GOT LBA A970GOT LBD A970GOT TBA EU and A970GOT SBA EU Generic term of A975GOT and A970GOT Generic term of AJ60GOT EBA A960GOT EBD and A960GOT EBA EU Generic term of A95eWGOT TBD Generic term of A956GOT TBD A956GOT SBD A956 A956GOT SBD M3 and A956GOT LBD M3 Generic term of AB53GOT TBD A953GOT SBD A953GOT LBD A953GOT TBD M3 A953GOT SBD M3 and A953GOT LBD M3 Generic term of A951GOT TBD A951GOT SBD A951GOT LBD A951GOT TBD M3 A951GOT SBD M3 and A951GOT LBD M3 Generic term of A951GOT QTBD A951GOT QSBD A951GOT QLBD A951GOT QTBD M3 A951GOT QSBD M3 and A951GOT QLBD M3 Gener
158. arity and the stop bit to the bit of DO to D5 as follows 07 06 05 D4 D3 02 D1 DO 236 1 1 0 0 0 0 eee specification 19200bps Setting of communication Parity even number port 2 Stop bit 2 bit Set the station number as follows 237 1 No 1 15 SHARP PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 15 2 2 Connecting to the link unit To connect the GOT to the link unit it is necessary to make settings for initial communication Set the switches on the link unit as follows For details of the setting method refer to the operation manual of the link unit Switch No Setting item ON 4 wire SW3 ON even number Setting of transmission speed 15 6 15 6 15 SHARP PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 15 3 Connection cable 15 3 1 RS 422 cable The RS 422 cable connection diagram and the connector for the PLC CPU and the link unit are as follows 1 Connection diagram a PLC CPU JW 22CU JW 70CUH JW 100CUH Sharp GOT D sub 15 pin male metric me D sub 25 pin male metric Cable connection and direction of signal screw type screw type aaa DTE D Lg is Pin No SS RD 3 SDA me Lj M Pan a SG shield GOT D sub 15 pin male metric D sub 25 pin male metric screw type screw type 15 7 15 7 15 SHARP PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT
159. ations selectable 3 A termination resistor is needed to install the GOT at the end of the CC Link system 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the PLC CPU Applicati ication GOT unit CC Link communication unit E CC Link connected intelligent A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A8GT J61BT13 device station GOT A956WGOT A956GOT QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N 1 AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 CC Link system master local unit CC Link dedicated cable Refer to the user s manual of the CC Link master local unit used 1 Set the station No that corresponds to the GOT as Ver 1 intelligent device station in the CC Link parameter settings of GX Developer 8 CC LINK CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 8 2 Monitoring Specification 8 2 1 Monitoring Overview When the A8GT J61BT13 is used the GOT has the following two monitoring methods Monitoring Method Monitoring by Transient Transmission Monitoring by Cyclic Transmission Devices of the PLC CPU on the CC Link Remote inputs outputs and remote registers system Master local station are specified and assigned to the Master station by CC Link monitored parameter setting are specified and monitored CC Link parameter setting sequence prog ram 2 is required but GOT communication Data communication processing speed 1 is sequence program 2 is not needed
160. ations or 4 stations The in the table indicates the address allocated to the master module by the station number setting a When monitoring using the normal monitor method Signal Direction GOT Master module Signal Direction Master module GOT Number of occupied stations Signal name Number of occupied stations Signal name 2 station 4 stations 2 station 4 stations RXn0 to RXn0 to RYn0 to RYn0 to RX n 2 F RX n 6 RY n 2 F RY n 6 F RX n 3 B to RX n 7 B to RX n 3 F RX n 7 RX RX n 7 n 3 0 to 7 0 to Unusable 3 RX n 7 A RXns98 RX n 7B eie Unusable RY n 3 F RY n 7 F X 1 The remote ready turns ON at GOT power on at hardware reset or when the GOT is in an operable state If the GOT has been powered on the flag is OFF during offline operation OS installation screen data downloading or during initial processing execution Use this flag in an interlock ladder for write read performed from the CC Link master station 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT b When monitoring using the dedicated monitor method Signal Direction GOT Master module Signal Direction Master module gt GOT Number of occupied stations Signal name Number of occupied stations Signal name 2 station 4 stations 2 station 4 stations RXn0 to RXn0 to RYn0 to RYn0 to RX n 2 F RX n 6 F RY n 2 F RY n 6 F RX n 3 0 RX n 7 0 GOT complete
161. bar codes and write them to PLC 1 Power supply unit for Refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT900 Series for the connectable supplying power to bar code bar code readers power supply units and cables reader 1 2 RS 232C cable between power supply unit and GOT 2 1 The bar code reader must be supplied with power 5VDC from the AC DC adaptor and compatible power supply unit 2 Not needed depending on the bar code reader used 21 1 21 1 21 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 21 2 Printer 21 2 1 System configuration 1 System configuration The following system configuration assumes connection of a printer The numbers 1 to 3 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 3 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications 2 Printer 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection of a printer Applicati Type ication bi 2 A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT with built in printer interface Printer connected GOT A956WGOT A95 GOT A9GT 50PRF ESP P24 J84 grade printer ESC P command ready Hewlett Packard make printer PCL command ready Chinese GB BIG5 printer ESC P command ready Printer for outputting reports hard copies etc Printer cable between GOT and printer 1 20 3 1 The
162. bbreviation of ATSD59J MIF memory card interface unit Abbreviation of A9GT 80V4R1 type Video RGB mixed input interface unit Abbreviation of ASGT 80V4 type Video input interface unit Abbreviation of ASGT 80R1 type RGB input interface unit Abbreviation of SW5D5C GTWORKS E software package Generic term of SW5D5C GOTR PACKE software package and SW5D5C GOTR PACKEV software package Abbreviation of image creation software GT Designer for GOT900 Abbreviation of GT Simulator screen simulator GOT900 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter for GOT900 Abbreviation of debugging software GT Debugger Abbreviation of GT Manager data editing software for GOT900 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT monitoring software Generic term of SWLID5C GPPW E SWLID5F GPPW E software packages Generic term of SWLID5C LLT E ladder logic test tool function software packages SW5D5C LLT E or later i 1 3 0 1 1 e 1 d 1 o 1 Abbreviations and generi terms QnACPU Large Generic term of Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU and Q4ARCPU CPU units Generic term of ATNCPU A2NCPU A2NCPU S1 and A3NCPU CPU units ACPU Small Type Generic term of A2US H CPU AnS H CPU and A1SJ H CPU CPU units ACPU Generic term of ACPU Large Type ACPU Small Type and ATFXCPU CPU units Generic term of series FXON series FXOS series FX1 series FX1N series FX1NC series FX1S serie
163. below Command Command name Details Designated amount of data is continuously read from the designated device Designated amount of data is continuously written into the designated device Random read Data is read from multiple different device addresses Random write Data is written into multiple different device addresses Batch read command Batch write command 20 7 20 7 20 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 20 5 2 Data communication type 2 types of data communication are available in using commands Each data communication type is explained below Data communication type is switched with the utility function of the GOT Refer to GOT A900 series Operating Manual GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 compatible Extended Option Functions Manual for details of the utility function Protocol for selection Type 1 Type 2 STX Command Data Data communication type host 2GOT 64 points max Sum check range Data ETX Read command in RD RR transmission 64 points max 03H Response data type in normal operation GOT host gt Sum check range Write command in WD RW transmission Response data type in error GOT host Interrupt Interrupt output data Interrupt output type GOT host output data Mere aa Sum check range 1 When type 2 is used the error code is stored for interrupt output Each error code is shown b
164. cable 9 Connection cable 7 Connection cable 8 Connection cable 6 6m 1 30 36 6 gt l 1 Also includes the extension cable length between base unit and base unit when the extension base unit is used 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the motion controller CPU A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU S3 Type s s mage No Application GOT unit Bus connection Bus connection board 1 2 unit 1 2 A9GT BUSS A9GT BUSSU A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT BUS2S A9GT BUS2SU A9GT BUSSU Bus connected GOT at TOO AJGTIOWBUSS A9GT BUS2SU termination A9GT BUSSU BesponT A9GT BUS2SU A951GOT with built in communication interface A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT BUS2S A9GT BUS2SU Bus connected GOT at A956WGOT A9GT BUS2SU midpoint A9GT BUS2SU A7GT BUS2S Unit for conversion of connection cable connectors and also for extension of A7GT CNB distance between GOT and base unit Connection cable between base unit and GOT 3 A370C12B S1 1 2m A370C25B S1 2 5m Connection cable between base unit and GOT 3 Connection cable between base unit and bus A370C12B 1 2m A370C25B 2 5m connector conversion box 3 Connection cable between base unit and base unit 3 Connection cable between ACO6B 0 6m AC12B 1 2m AC12B R 1 2m base unit and bus AC30B
165. cessing and communication line open processing sequence programs are needed Necessary communication parameters and sequence program examples will be given below a Communication parameters The following are the communication parameter setting examples Setting item Application setting 1 100H IP address of E71 192 168 0 2 E71 port number 5001 IP address of other node FFFFFFFF Other node port number FFFF 2 1 Value specified for application setting The user can change the settings of 1 2 and 3 4 5 and 6 are fixed settings The following shows details of the application setting b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 8 5 4 3 2 1 1 Fixed buffer application 0 For send no communication 1 For receive 2 Existence check 0 No 1 Yes 3 Paring open 0 No 1 Yes 4 Communication system Set to 1 UDP IP 5 Fixed buffer communication Set to 0 With procedure 0 With procedure 1 Without procedure 6 Open system Set to 00 Active UDP IP 2 The other node port number is a fixed setting The user can change the other settings 11 4 11 4 11 ETHERNET CONNECTION Initial processing b Sequence program MELSEC GOT lt IP address 192 168 0 2 M9038 XIF J t HOCOAS80002 D100 Initial WDT ERR IP addre processi detactio Set IP address HO KO D100 K2 IP addr
166. cipe function etc PC card A985 97 960GOT 2 Installation 9 Installation A95 GOT A1SD59J MIF e Video camera By connecting a video camera to the GOT you can display a picture taken with the video camera in the GOT video window A985GOT V Video cammera SH AQGT 80V4 S Pd 0 f Personal computer By connecting a personal computer to the GOT you can display the personal computer screen on the GOT A985GOT V A9GT 80R1 Personal commputer MELSEC GOT g Servo amplifier By connecting servo amplifiers to the GOT you can perform various monitor functions parameter setting changes test operation and others for the servo amplifiers RS 232C RS 422cabal RS 232C RS 422 cabal converter MELSEC GOT 1 2 Overall system configurations System configurations are given below on a GOT mode basis 1 A985GOT A97 GOT A960GOT Bus connection Refer to Chapter 3 Bus connection interface board lt A9GT QBUSS A9GT QBUS2S QCPU Q mode iu A9GT BUSS A9GT BUS2S Bus connection interface unit 7 A9GT BUSSU efaceunt QnACPU ACPU large small CPU direct connection Refer to Chapter 4 QCPU Q A mode RS 232C serial communication board EXCPU lt A9GT RS2 T m
167. ction 14 4 and fabricate on user side g adaptor and GOT 1 The connection cable may also be fabricated on user side Refer to Section 14 4 for details of the fabrication method 14 2 14 2 14 ALLEN BRADLEY PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 14 2 Initial settings 14 2 1 PLC side settings For monitoring with connection to the GOT make the communication settings and the port settings with the peripheral tool as follows For details refer to the operation manual of the Allen Bradley PLC 1 When connecting one CPU Setting of Allen Bradley PLC 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps SLC500 series EVEN Parity MicroLogix1000 series NONE MicroLogix1500 series NONE 1 The SLC500 series does not support 38400bps 2 When connecting multiple CPUs Setting of Adpter Disable No Handshaking 1 For the maximum node address set the same address as the maximum node address on the DH 485 network 2 Set the same address as the adaptor address which is set in the setup of the GOT s utility function Set the DH 485 node address carefully so that it does not overlap the node address of the PLC on the DH 485 network 14 3 14 3 14 ALLEN BRADLEY PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 14 2 2 GOT side settings When connecting the GOT and Allen Bradley PLC you need to make the following settings on Setup of the GOT s utility function Baud rate Set the
168. d wires to control box or like 6 The A8GT C100EXSS 1 A8GT C200EXSS 1 A8GT C300EXSS 1 cable consists of the A8GT EXCNB 0 5m and A8GT C100BS 10m C200BS 20m C300BS 30m respectively The length of the A8GT EXCNB 0 5m need not be considered when calculating the cable length 3 11 3 11 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 3 2 4 Connection with A0J2HCPU 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configuration and connection conditions assume bus connection with the A0J2HCPU The numbers 1 to 4 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 4 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Up to one GOT may be connected Connection Conditions Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance 2 Power supply unit 1 GOT Within 1m 3 Connection 4 Connection cable cable Max 1m 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the A0J2HCPU No Application Bus connection Bus connection GOT unit board 1 unit 1 A9GT BUSS A9GT BUSSU A9GT BUS2S A9GT BUS2SU A9GT BUSSU A956WGOT A9GT 50WBUSS Bus connected GOT at A9GT BUS2SU termination A9GT BUSSU A956GOT A9GT BUS2SU A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A951GOT with built in communication interface A0J2 PW Unit for supplying power to A0J2HCPU
169. d communication unit memory board external I O interface unit or memory card interface unit onto from the GOT Not doing so can cause a module failure or malfunction N CAUTION e The GOT should be used in the environment given in the general specifications of the GOT user s manual Not doing so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration e When mounting the GOT main unit to an enclosure tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or module e When loading the communication board or communication module to the GOT main unit fit it to the connection interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a drop failure or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or module e When loading the memory board into the GOT main unit load it into its corresponding GOT slot and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault Overtightening can cause a malfunction due to the damage of the screws or module e When loading the PC card into the GOT main unit insert and push it into its corresponding GOT slot until the PC card eject button comes up N
170. d by switching power on again after installation of the system programs Operating System communication driver etc into the GOT After the functions have started touch the Setup icon to display the Setup screen and make settings related to Matsushita Electric Works PLC When multiple GOTs peripheral devices are connected to a single PLC CPU via the C C U Computer Communication Unit there are the following restrictions on the number of units that allow Yes to be selected for C C U monitor registration When other than FP10SH is used 1 unit When FP10SH is used 5 units Choose No when the number of GOTs peripheral devices used is greater than the above 19 10 19 10 19 MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC WORKS PLC MELSEC GOT 19 3 Connection cables The methods of fabricating the RS 232C cables for connection of the GOT and PLC CPU cable connection diagrams and connectors are given below 1 User fabricated cable 1 a Connection diagram GOT D sub 9 pin female inch screw type AFP8550 converter adaptor D sub 25 pin male Cable connection and direction of signal b Connector and connector cover Connector for GOT HDEB 9S 05 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD HDE CTH1 4 40 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD AFP8550 converter adaptor side connector D sub 25 pin female connector c Precautions for cable preparation Fabricate the cable within the length of 15m 49 18feet 19 11 19 11
171. d monitor Master station gt GOT RWwm Lower byte method 2 Switch to the normal monitor method RWwm 1 to RWwm GOT Master station RWrn to RWrn c Communication overview M i GOT PLC CPU aster remote register remote register 1 2 To ww O101H 0101H 1 Store the initial setting command data in the master station s remote register RWw 2 Turn on the initial data setting request flag and store the command data in the GOT remote register RWw Command execution The initial data setting complete flag turns on when the command processing is complete By executing this command the GOT will be in the monitor status with the dedicated command monitor method 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION d Sequence program example FROM HO HE3 K4M48 Always ON Remote Error ready flag status flag command M59 M58 11 MOV H0101 HO H1E0 D100 Initial processing complete flag M57 ON at processing complete SET SSP RR SRK Slee SSS Re SRO SS RASS SS RR COS T E Always ON RST MELSEC GOT K1 Remote input RX read D1 00 Command data storage K1 H Transfers master station RWwO Initial processing request flag ON command execution HO H163 K4M148 K1 H Remote output RY write 9 CC LINK CONNECTION
172. dedicated computer link module cannot be used 9 The GOT will monitor the host when the device monitored is set as N W No 0 and Station No 0 The station does not actually exist The device ranges that can be monitored are the ranges for monitoring the ACPU A3ACPU equivalent 2 SPECIFICATION MELSEC GOT 2 2 Monitoring of special function unit 1 2 When using bus connection CPU direct connection computer link connection The special function modules on the bases of the connected station and other stations can be monitored Special module monitoring for computer link connection is enabled for the systems of the following combinations PLC CPU used Computer link serial communication module used QCPU Q mode QJ71C24 QCPU A mode A1SJ71UC24 QCPU A mode AJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24 lacpu A mode AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24 When using MELSECNET II connection MELSECNET B connection The special function module on the base of the master station can be monitored Cannot be monitored when the master station is the QnACPU The special function modules on the bases of local stations cannot be monitored In a system configuration having remote stations special function modules cannot be monitored When using MELSECNET 10 connection The special function modules on the bases of the control station and normal stations can be monitored Cannot be monitored when the stations are the QnACPU In a sys
173. e 15 Communication board Within 200m 9 RS 422 cable Max 200m 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the CS1 Application 9 pp GOT unit Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT _ A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T Omron PLC connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 232C communication GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT _ A9GT RS4 Omron PLC connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS4 422 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface CS1 SCB21 CS1 SCB41 Communication board fos1 s0841 RS 232C cable between CPU and GOT RS 232C cable between communication unit and RS 232C cable between Refer to Section 12 3 and fabricate on user side communication board and 12 OMRON PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 12 1 8 Connection with CJ1 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the The numbers 1 to 6 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 1 to 6 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Con
174. e MELSEC GOT The connection diagram and connectors for the RS 232C cables between the Toshiba PLC and the GOT are as follows 1 Connection diagram a T2E CM232E Toshiba PLC side D sub 9 pin male millimeter screw type Toshiba PLC side D sub 15 pin male millimeter screw type Cable connection and direction of signal GOT side D sub 25 pin male millimeter screw type RD RXD SD TXD DTR ER GOT side D sub 25 pin male millimeter screw type CD RD RXD SD TXD DTR ER SG DSR DR 8 csc o9 j 2 Connector and connector cover GOT connector HDEB 9S 05 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD HDE CTH1 4 40 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD Toshiba PLC connector T2E CM232E Connector with cover 17JE 23090 02 D8C DDK b T2N DAC 15P FO Connector DA 15 P N Japan Aviation Electronics cs Industry Ltd C DA 110963 2 Over GM 15LK HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO LTD 16 5 16 5 16 TOSHIBA PL NNECTION MELSEC GOT 3 Precautions for preparation of connector The cable to be fabricated should be within 15m long 17 SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT Chapter17 SIEMENS PLC connection 17 1 System configuration 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the SIMATIC S7 300 series or SIMATIC S7 400 series The numbers 1 to 3 given
175. e connection with the FP10 S The numbers 1 to 7 given in the system configuration denote the numbers 1 to 7 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance Connected to TOOL port AFP peripheral 2 Adaptor 5 232 Within 15 5m connection cable cable A la Max 15 5m gt nnected to COM a 1 GOT 8 RS 232C cable 15 Within 15m 3 Link interface unit ao 7 RS 232C cable Max 15m 2 System equipment The table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the FP10 S Type Image Application BD E Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T Matsushita Electric Works A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 PLC connected GOT hewor A953GOT with built in communication interface Link interface unit AFP3462 FP peripheral connection cable between TOOL port of PLC AFP5520 0 5m CPU and adaptor 2 Refer to Section 19 3 and fabricate on the user side User fabricated cable 1 adaptor and GOT RS 232C cable between rt of PLC CPU and GOT 1 Jand GOTT FC8
176. e ss TURN on Initial request signal SET Y19 Initial request lt Read initial error code 19 4E FROM HO D200 K1 Initial ERR error detactio n Turn OFF initial request signal RST Y19 Initial request initial request PLF M102 M102 3A CSET Y17 COM ERR OFF lt Glear initial error code Communication open file To K1 RST Y17 COM ERR OFF Enable stop y8 y9 are OFF 1S 46 To HiFO H8001 K1 Initial request X10 X19 56 MovP H100 D110 Open com Initial Setting plte No normal c use purp 1 omplete ose lt Communication method set UDP IP ToP HO K16 D110 K1 Setting use purp ose lt Set necessity GOT transfer set K5001 D111 E71 Port No XFFFFFFFF when used by GOT HOFFFFFFFF D112 GOT IP a ddress lt FFFF when used by GOT MovP HOFFFF 0114 GOT port No K24 D111 K4 E71 Port No SET Y8 Open req uest No 1 99 END 11 5 11 5 11 ETHERNET CONNECTION 11 6 MELSEC GOT In a communications ready status the E71 s RUN LED comes on and RDY LED flickers 4 Communications check When the preparations for communications via the E71 are complete execute the Ping command in the MS prompt of Windows When connections are OK C ping 192 168 0 2 Reply from 192 168 0 2 bytes 32 time 10ms TTL 32 When connections are not good C ping 192 16
177. e GOT and GX Developer or similar peripheral device or two GOTs connected to one serial communication unit Note that only one GOT can be connected to the serial communication module of function version A 5 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION MELSEC GOT b When connecting to AJ71QC24 N R4 Amaca x Station number switch Mode switch for CH1 2 Transmission specification switch for CH1 2 The value of the mode switch of an unused channel must be set to the value except O Interlocking operation When the AJ71QC24N R4 is used and the transmission speed is set to 38400bps the GOT side transmission speed must be re set For details of the setting method refer to Section 5 2 2 c When connecting A1SJQC24 N X 00000000 Mode switch for CH1 Transmission specification switch for CH1 When set to When set to 38400bps 19200bps Sees 2
178. e Magter station Remote device starion Address _ Remote input RX Remote input RX MO to M15 EO RX00 to RXOF M1610M31 E1 RXi0to RX1F M32 to M47 E2 RX20 to RX2F 48 0 _ Address Remote output RY Remote output RY M100 to M115 160 to RYOF 11610 M131 161 RY10OtoRYAF M132 to M147 162 RY20 to RY2F M14810M163 163 Remote register RWw Remote register RWw Address Write area Write area WERE D100 1E0H RWwO RWwO D101 1E1H Rwwi 14 RWwi 0102 1E2H RWw2 RWw2 D103 1 Rww3 t RWw3 ENS 0104 1E4H RWw4 RWw4 D105 1E5H RWw5 t RWw5 EE D106 1E6H RWw6 RWw6 017 sd 1E7H Rww o RWw7 Remote register RWr Remote register RWr Address Read area Read area D200 2E0H a D201 2 1 0202 2E2H heer D203 2E3H 0204 22v 0205 2E5H D206 2E6H 207 2E7H 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 3 Examples of created monitor screen data The following are the monitor screen data examples of the A970GOT A8GT J61BT15 remote device station Refer to the help function of GT Designer for the way to set each object function a Common setting PLC Type GOT Type Base Screen Switching Device MELSEC QnAQ A97 GOTIGT SoftGOT b Base screen No 1 settings T
179. e numbers 1 to 5 given in the system configuration denote the numbers 1 to 5 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance 1 3 CC Link system 2 Peripheral connection unit master local unit a NEN LL CC Link dedicated 1GOT Within 1230m T ARN 5 RS 422 TI Sn i 5 cable C WO Max 1200m le Max 30m 1 The installation distance maximum transmission distance varies with the transmission speed of the CC Link system For details refer to the CC Link System Master Local Unit User s Manual Details 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the QCPU mode Type Application Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS4 Link ia G4 connected G4 A9GT 50WRS4 GOT A950GOT With built in communication interface 2 Peripheral connection unit AJ65BT G4 S3 Link local E nk system masteroca QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N 1 Refer to the user s manual of the CC Link master local unit used AC100R4 25P 10 0m 4 25 30 0 1 Set the station No that corresponds to the peripheral connection unit as Ver 1 intelligent device station in the CC Link parameter settings of GX Developer 10 1 10 1 10 CC LINK
180. e settings must be changed Set the transmission speed on Setup of the GOT s utility function For details of the utility function refer to the GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 Compatible Extended Option Function OUTSIDE SPEAKER OFF ON SCREEN SAVE TIME 0 DHIN O FREE SCREEN SAVE LIGHT ON LANGUAGE AAs IRE QC24 Baud rate 38400 AJ71QC24N R4 and A1SJ71QC24N Baud rate Choose the transmission speed for connection with AJ71QC24N R4 Page 1 2 T T lt SELECT CHANGE A1SJ71QC24N gt lt Factory set to 19200bps POINT The utility function can be started by switching power on again after installing the system programs system OS communication driver etc into the GOT After the utility function has started touch the Setup icon to display the setup screen and make settings related to computer link connection 5 3 Transmission specifications The following transmission specifications apply to the case where communication is made between the GOT and computer link or serial communication module Using AJ71QC24N R4 R2 Using any module other than or A1SJ71QC24N R2 those indicated on left 38400bps 19200bps 38400bps 19200bps Using QJ71C24 R2 5 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 5 4 Connection cable MELSEC GOT The user needs to fabricate the RS 232C cable the RS 422 cable which is used to connect the GOT and PLC CP
181. e to designate the routing parameter 3 When the monitor target is the multi PLC system CPU No 1 to No 4 can be monitored 4 Devices of other stations other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter may not allow monitoring depending on their PLC CPU Refer to Examples 1 to 4 in 7 The motion controller CPU Q Series at other stations cannot be monitored b If connected to QCPU Q Mode QnACPU AnUCPU 1 The control station on the network and all normal stations can be monitored 2 The control station on the other network and all normal stations can be monitored To monitor the other network be sure to designate the routing parameter 3 If connected to an intermediate station and the data link system is included the master station and local stations can be monitored 4 If connected to an intermediate station it is not necessary to designate the data link parameter Effective unit number for accessing other stations for the PLC CPU of the connected station If designated the parameter will be ignored 5 Devices of other stations other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter may not allow monitoring depending on their PLC CPU Refer to Examples 1 to 4 in 7 c If connected to ANACPU AnNCPU 1 Control stations on the network can be monitored If the PLC CPU of the local station is QCPU Mode QnACPU devices other than B and W that are allocated by the network pa
182. ecifications 6 RS 422 cable 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the GL120 or GL 130 Image Application R GOT unit Serial communication board ee TUE A97 GOT A960GOT RS2 A9GT RS2T Yaskawa PLC connected RS lagsewGOT IASGT SOWRS2 50WRS2 232C communication GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface A985GOT V 97 A960GOT A9GT RS4 Yaskawa PLC connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS4 422 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface S Memo bus unit 180 cP st o0 0 Memo pusut 129 nom271 o0 RS 232C cable between memo bus unit and GOT Refer to Section 13 3 and fabricate on user side RS 422 cable between memo bus unit and GOT 13 2 13 2 13 YASKAWA PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 13 1 3 Connection with CP 9200SH 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configuration and connection conditions assume connection with the CP 9200SH The numbers 1 to 3 given in the system configurations denote the numbers to 3 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions _ Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance E Changes with lt gt lMemo bus unit the connection RS 232C cable target CPU specifications
183. ection and direction of signal Screw type screw type es shield 1 1 2W 120 resistor must be connected between RXA and RXB on the Toshiba PLC side b T2E CM231E GOT side Toshiba PLC side tA D sub 25 pin male millimeter Cable connection and direction of signal Screw type 59 nia 1 RXA and TERM on the Toshiba PLC side must be shorted Connect to the terminator resistor 16 3 16 3 16 TOSHIBA PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT C T2N Toshiba PLC side GOT side D sub 15 pin male millimeter screw type D sub 25 pin male millimeter Cable connection and direction of signal screw type E mimm 56 na 1 A 1 2W 120 resistor must be connected between RXA and RXB on the Toshiba PLC side 2 Connector and connector cover to be used Connector for GOT Connector with cover 17JE 23250 02 D8A6 DDK Connector for TOSHIBA PLC T3 H T2 PU224 type model3000 S3 c T2 DA 15 P N Japan Aviation Electronics Industry Ltd C DA 110963 2 over GM 15LK HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO LTD b 2 Bar type bare crimping terminal refer to the manual of the Toshiba PLC for details Connector 3 Precautions for preparation of connector The cable to be fabricated should be within 1000m long 16 4 16 4 16 TOSHIBA PLC CONNECTION 16 3 2 RS 232C cabl
184. ed 6 2 CHAPTER7 MELSECNET CONNECTION NETWORK SYSTEM 7 1107 2 1 1 System configuration to ee gebe dee ge Lee det 7 1 7 2 Switch setting of network Unitu nennen nnne nnne nennen enne 7 2 Po Self diagnosis test eid eodem 7 2 8 CC LINK CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION 8 1to 8 12 9 1 System configuratiort i oi aon Ege Aachen ed ep eee a m d d data 8 1 8 2 Monitoring Specification nennen nennen neret 8 2 9 2 1 Monitoring OVerVieWw e ai ere EE ede ee ede E 8 2 8 2 2 Signals Transfered to from the Master module sseeeeeneenee 8 8 8 2 3 Remote Register ernannt stet tnt 8 8 8 9 Programmlrig ii rec md ede p ed bd ep e do da e to eo 8 9 9 3 1 System confIguration a inem ere D Le Date meo Ded eee Dd keen Carr a ee dele 8 9 8 3 2 Relationships between corresponding devices ssssssssssssssseeeeeneennen ens 8 9 8 3 3 Monitor screen examples t n det gp de ir a tee itt 8 10 8 3 4 A8GT J61BT13 switch setting sss 8 12 8 3 5 Parameter setting example setting using GX 8 12 CHAPTERY CC LIN
185. ed 2 Initial Timing Independently of this setting communications can be made from GX Developer if the PLC CPU is at a STOP 3 Enable Write at RUN time Independently of this setting online program correction or device test can be performed from GX Developer 11 12 11 12 11 ETHERNET CONNECTION 11 13 3 Communications check Refer to Section 11 2 1 5 for communications check 4 Settings with GT Designer and GOT MELSEC GOT a Perform the settings of the Q Series compatible E71 to be monitored in Ethernet Setting of GT Designer Set the IP address assigned to the Q Series compatible E71 to be connected to Refer to GT Designer Help function for Ethernet setting Ethernet setting list Host PLC No Type IP address Port No Communication J 1 1 0071 7 19216801 002 1 2 1 7 janen 9216802 or Set to Host b Set the GOT using Setup of the GOT Refer to Section 11 2 5 for details of the setting GOT NET 001 17 239 GOT 01 1 64 GOT IP ADDRESS 000 000 000 000 GOT PORT No 05001 102465534 ROUTER ADDRESS 000 000 000 000 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 000 SEND MESSAGE WAIT 000 xi0ms 0 300 SEND MESSAGE TIME 03 sec 390 START UP TIME 0 0 3 0 255 Page 2 2 T lt SELECT CHANGE 11 13 11 ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 11 2 4 How to Set Devices Using GT
186. eded for connection with the MP 920 MP 930 CP 9300MS CP 9200 H or PROGIC 8 Type No Application mee Je GOT unit Serial communication board Image RII A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T AQ56WGOT AQGT 50WRS2 Yaskawa PLC connected RS 232C communication GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface RS 232C cable bet CPU cape petween Refer to Section 13 3 and fabricate on user side and GOT 13 4 13 4 13 YASKAWA PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 13 1 5 Connection with GL120 or GL130 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the MP 940 The numbers 1 to 4 given in the system configurations denote the numbers to 4 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation connected distance Changes with the connection target CPU specifications System Configuration RS 422 cable 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the MP 940 Application Yaskawa PLC connected RS 232C communication GOT Yaskawa PLC connected RS 422 communication GOT RS 232C cable between memo bus unit and GOT RS 422 cable between memo bus unit and GOT 13 5 Type GOT unit Serial communicati
187. elow in detail Error details Sum check error An error has occurred at the sum check after receipt of communication packet Check the communication line and the transmission packet Command error Request command which is not supported was used Check the request command data which was transmitted Data length error 9 Check if the total number of bytes in the The data volume exceeded the upper limit MN CDEN transmission data packet is within 518 bytes of the reception buffer 20 8 20 8 20 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION MELSEC GOT Error details Point excess error The allowance of read write device was Check the range of the designated device exceeded Address error Top address of read write device is not within the range Check the top address of the designated device Communication data error When the communication data is received this error occurs if EXT is not found before the upper limit of the reception buffer is exceeded Check the communication data 20 9 20 9 20 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 20 5 3 Precautions for use The sum check code is the last 1 byte 8bit value of the result sum from addition of binary data in the range of the sum check Example Reading RD command with D100 to D101 02H 52 44H 30H 31H 42H 43H 4 Sum check range Formula 52H 44H 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 32H 03H 1BCH 20 10 20 10
188. em equipment needed for connection of a personal computer when RGB screen is displayed Application Type mage b GOT unit RGB input interface unit E A9GT 80R1 RGB z T V Se x A9GT 80VAR1 video RGB Connection cable between gt 2 Refer to Section 21 6 2 and fabricate on user side Q ja gu 21 20 21 20 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 21 6 2 Connect cable The following are the specifications connection diagram and connectors of the cable used to connect the GOT and personal computer 1 Cable specifications Specifications Applicable cable SP23 23352A UL20276 SB or equivalent Applicable cable size 9 core composite cable recommended 2 Connection diagram GOT side 3 Connector and connector cover GOT connector Use the connector matching the following model for the GOT 15 pin D sub male inch screw type Manufactured by DDK 17HE R13150 73MC2 Personal computer connector Use the connector applicable to the personal computer used 4 Precautions for cable preparation The cable length depends on the specifications of the personal computer used Fabricate the cable within the range of the personal computer specifications 21 21 21 21 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 21 7 Servo Amplifier 21 7 1 System configuration 1 System configuration The fo
189. er Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power comp
190. er memory and remote device stations PLC CPU Master station GOT Remote device starion Address Remote input RX Remote input RX MO to M15 EO RX00 to RXOF M16toM31 E1 RX10to RX1F M32 to M47 E2 RX20 to RX2F M4810M63 to _ Address Remote output RY Remote output RY M100 to M115 160 RYO0O to RYOF Mi1610M131 161 RY10to RYAF M132 to M147 162 RY20 to RY2F M14810M163 163 Remote register RWw Remote register RWw Address Write area Write area D100 1E0H DER Di01 1E1H D102 1E2H ELSE D103 1E3H D104 1E4H XOU 0105 1E5H D106 1E6H D107 1E7H Remote register RWr Remote register RWr Address Read area Read area D200 2E0H 201 2E1H D202 2E2H p D203 2E3H D204 2E4H p 0205 2E5H D206 2E6H 0207 2E7H 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 1 Initial setting command a Initial setting command This is the initial setting command for monitoring with the GOT internal device Create a sequence program for initial setting command to be processed before the commands described in 2 and after are executed b Command format Transfer Direction Write data RWwm Higher byte 1 Initial setting 1 Monitoring by the dedicated comman
191. erial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT 9 54 h PLC RS 422 Sharp PEG connected RS 422 AQGT 50WRS4 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface RS 422 cable between link unit and GOT Refer to Section 15 4 and fabricate on user side 15 3 15 3 15 SHARP PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 15 1 4 Connection with JW 70CUH or JW 100CUH 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the JW 70CUH or JW 100CUH The numbers 1 to 6 given in the system configurations denote the numbers to 5 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications System Configuration connected distance e 4 RS 232C cable Changes with EP 5 422 cable the connection target CPU specifications y 3 Link unit 6 RS 422 cable 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the JW 70CUH or JW 100CUH ee Type Application TEPE Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T Sharp PLC connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 232C communication GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS4 Sharp PLC connected
192. es that can dedicated command be displayed on one screen is small 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 1 Normal monitor method In the monitor overview the remote output and remote register write area are described separately from the remote input and remote register read area but all of the information can be displayed on one screen for monitoring Monitor for remote output and remote register write area PLC CPU GOT The monitor point depending on the number of occupied stations setting When 2 stations are set RYn0 to RY n 2 F 48 points RWwm to RWwm 7 8 points Master When 4 stations are set station RYn0 to RY n 6 F 112 points RWwm to RWwm F 16 points RY 1 Using the sequence program the data is stored in the remote output RY and the remote register RWw of GOT s allocated to the master station 2 Data is stored in the GOT s remote output and re mote register by link scan 3 The specified remote output and remote register aremonitored 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT Monitor write from GOT for remote input and remote register read area PLC CPU The monitor point vary depending on the number of FROM occupied stations setting When 2 stations are set RYn0 to RY n 2 F 48 points RWrm to RWrm 7 8 points Maste
193. esponding software package is installed Generic term of the MR J2S L1A MR J2S LICP and MR J2M A series n this manual the following products are called by new names Old Name GPPW GX Developer Generic term of SWLIDS5C GPPW E SWLID5F GPPW E software packages A 15 A 15 MELSEC GOT Chapter1 Overview This manual describes the specifications system configurations setting method connection cables and other information of each connection supported by the GOT When applying the following program examples to the actual system make sure to examine the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems PONT For connection of GT SoftGOT refer to the Version 5 Operating Manual 1 1 Connection supported by GOT 1 Bus connection Refer to Chapter 3 Bus connection is a way of using the extension connector of a base unit for connection of the GOT connection by I O bus and this connection form has the fastest response to a PLC CPU among the GOT connection forms Multiple GOTs can be connected in a position away from the PLC CPU to be connected to However only one GOT may be connected depending on the PLC CPU to be connected to Connection with QCPU Q Mode UL Ro E Example Connection with A2USCPU Example Connection with Q25HCPU Example Connection with Q2ACPU units4
194. f the utility functions refer to the GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 Compatible Extended Option Function Manual 001 17 239 GOT PC No 01 15 64 GOT ADDRESS 000 000 000 000 GOT PORT No 05001 10247 65534 ROUTER ADDRESS 000 000 000 000 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 000 SEND MESSAGE WAIT 000 x10ms 0300 SEND MESSAGE TIME 03 sec 3 90 START UP TIME 0 0 3 0 255 Page 2 2 T lt SELECT CHANGE Setting item Factory setting GOT NET No Set the network number of the GOT Set the station number of the GOT Do not set the same number as the PLC No of the Ethernet unit to be monitored GOT IP ADDRESS Set the IP address of the GOT 000 000 000 000 GOT PORT No Set the port number of the GOT 5001 If the system is connected with the other network by a router set the router address of the network where the 000 000 000 000 GOT is connected When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network SUBNET MASK controlled by the sub net set the sub net mask 255 255 255 000 commonly set to the networks SEND MESSAGE the send wait time to reduce loads on the network WAIT and corresponding PLC SEND MESSAGE Set the time out period 3 TIME 2 Set how many seconds after GOT power on the START UP TIME 3 communication with the PLC CPU will be started 1 Set the IP address after consulting with the network manager person who does network
195. ffer according to the set number of occupied stations 1 or 4 stations n in the table indicates the address assigned to the Master module by station number setting ee Direction GOT Master module Direction Master module GOT Devicenumber number _ Devicenumber number Number of occupied stations Signal name Number of occupied stations Signal name to 9 User area RNO RYNO to User area RXnF X n 6 F RYnF RY n 6 F X n 7 0 to 1 0 to 7 0 to Reserved R m wale RY n 7 A E Remote Remote ready flagi flag 1 RY n 7 B Reserved RX n 1 C to X n 7 C to Y n 1 x to RY n 7 C to Reserved RX n 1 F RX n 7 F RY n 1 F RY n 7 F 1 The remote ready flag is on during startup of the GOT It switches on when GOT power is switched on hardware reset is made or the GOT is ready to operate If GOT power is on the remote ready flag is off when offline operation is performed during OS installation or screen data downloading or while initial processing is executed Use it for the interlock ladder when writing or reading data to or from the CC Link Master station Among the output signals from the Master module to the GOT do not output the reserved signals Doing so can cause the PLC system to misoperate 8 2 3 Remote Register Assignment The following is the assignment of the remote registers of the GOT The remote registers differ according to the set number of occupied
196. figuration connected distance Within 15m 3 Communication unit 6 RS 422 cable Within 200m Max 200m 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the Type Image Application CAE GOT unit Serial communication board 97 960 RS2 A9GT RS2T Omron PLC connected RS lagsewGOT IAQGT SOWRS2 50WRS2 232C communication GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS4 Omron PLC connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS4 422 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface RS 232C cable between CPU and GOT RS 232C cable between communication unit and GOT Refer to Section 12 3 and fabricate on user side RS 422 cable between communication board and GOT 12 9 12 9 12 OMRON PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 12 2 Initial Setting 12 2 1 Switch setting of upper link unit When using the upper link unit C200H LK201 V1 C200H LK202 V1 C500H LK201 V1 set the switches as follows 1 When using C200H LK201 V1 Switches on the front 1 SW1 and SW2 Machine No LK201 V1 Set SW1 0 SW2 0 Machine No 00 RUN XM 2 SW3 Transmission speed RCV Set SW3 6 19 2 kbps ERROR 3 SW4 Command level parity transmission code Z Parity Even
197. flag RY n 3 0 RY n 7 0 GOT request flag 3 1 RY n 7 1 GOT monitor request flag n 3 1 to n 7 1 to r eabla RY n 3 2 RY n 7 2 GOT always write request flag RY n 3 3 to RY n 7 3 to Unusable RY n 3 8 RY n 7 8 RX n 3 9 RX n 7 9 Initial data setting complete flag RY n 3 9 RY n 7 9 Initial data setting request flag RX n 3 A RX n 7 A Error status flag RY n 3 A RY n 7 A Error reset request flag B B RX n 3 B RX n 7 B Remote ready 1 RY n 3 RY n 7 RX n 3 RX n 7 C to M RY n 3 C to RY n 7 C to Unusable 3 7 RY n 3 F RY n 7 F 1 The remote ready flag turns ON at GOT power on at hardware reset or when the GOT is in an operable state If the GOT has been powered on the flag is OFF during offline operation OS installation screen data downloading or during initial processing execution Use this flag in an interlock ladder for write read performed from the CC Link master station DANGER Do not output the reserved signals among the output signals provided from the master module to the GOT If any of the reserved signals is output the PLC system may malfunction 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 2 Details of the I O signals The function of each I O signal is described below a GOT complete flag RX n 3 0 RX n 7 0 GOT request flag RY n 3 0 RY n 7 0 By turning on the GOT request flag each command which uses the GOT internal device to monit
198. for cable fabrication The maximum cable length changes with the specifications of the SIEMENS PLC used For details refer to the instruction manual of the SIEMENS PLC 17 3 17 3 18 HITACHI PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT Chapter18 Hitachi PLC connection 18 1 System configurations 18 1 1 Connection with large H series 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the large series The numbers 1 to 6 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 1 to 6 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance 1 RS 232C cable i la Max 15m Within 15m 1 J 3 Link interface unit 6 RS 422 cable p Within 200m gt J Cee N 200m gt 1 When plugging the connection cable into the large H series connect it to the peripheral port the CPU module 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the large H series Application Type mage 9 GOT unit Serial communication board Hitachi PLC connected RS 956 A9GT 50WRS2 232C communication GOT with built in communication interface A985GOT V A97 G
199. g when supplying power to the PLC CPU and GOT NCAUTION To prevent trouble from occurring the extension cable which connects the PLC CPU and GOT should be unplugged when the PLC CPU and GOT are off 1 Precautions for switching power on Switch on the PLC CPU and GOT in either of the following methods This also applies to the case where several GOTs are connected a Switch on the PLC CPU and GOT at the same time b Switch on the PLC CPU and GOT in this order Switching on the GOT runs the PLC CPU When several GOTs are connected there is no specific sequence of switching on the GOTs Switching on all GOTs runs the PLC CPU Power on the GOT A900 series and Q4ARCPU duplex system in the following order 1 Power on the GOT A900 series 2 1 to 2 seconds after power on of the GOT A900 series power on the Q4ARCPU duplex System Bd Main base p Power supply Power supply ON 1 to 2s of Q4ARCPU Extension base of Q4ARCPU duplex system Se unu lt Bus connection cable ON Power supply Power supply of GOT A900 series of GOT A900 series OFF It is recommended to switch power on with an external circuit configured power is not switched in the order as specified in the restriction the Q4ARCPU duplex system will not start up in system A but will start up in system B before it starts control 2 Precautions for switching off the PLC
200. ges with y 2 Link unit the connection zz 3 RS 422 cable target CPU specifications 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the JW 21CU or JW 31CUH Applicati ication T i PER GOT unit Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT 9 54 h PLC RS 422 Sharp PLC connected RS 422 A9GT 50WRS4 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface RS 422 cable between link Refer to Section 15 4 and fabricate on user side 15 1 15 1 15 SHARP PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 15 1 2 Connection with JW 22CU JW 32CUH or JW 33CUH 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the JW 22CU JW 32CUH or JW 33CUH The numbers 1 to 6 given in the system configurations denote the numbers Et to 8 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications System Configuration connected distance e 4 RS 232C cable Changes with EP 5 422 cable the connection target CPU specifications y 3 Link unit o B RS 422 cable 15 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connectio
201. he following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the QnACPU large type Type Image Application Amen GOT unit Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T Computer link connected A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 232C communication GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS4 Computer link connected A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS4 422 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface unii AJ71QC24 AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24 R2 AJ71QC24N R2 Serial communication unit 1 AJ71QC24 R4 AJ71QC24N R4 Serial communication unit 1 AJ71QC24 AJ71QC24N RS 232C cable between serial communication unit and GOT Refer to Section 5 4 and fabricate on user side RS 422 cable between serial communication unit and GOT AC30R4 25P 3 0m AC100R4 25P 10 0m AC300R4 25P 30 0m RS 422 cable between serial Refer to Section 5 4 and fabricate on user side communication unit and GOT 1 For the system configuration on the serial communication unit side refer to the user s manual of the serial communication unit used 5 3 5 3 5 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 5 1 4 Connection with QnACPU small type 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume computer link connect
202. her stations on the network system cannot be monitored 4 MELSECNET 10 connection a The GOT is regarded as a normal station The control station on the network and all normal stations can be monitored If the PLC CPU to be monitored is QCPU ModeyQnACPU monitoring is available within the device access range for AnA The access range for monitoring of timer T and counter C is limited to O to 225 File registers R ER ZR cannot be monitored When the PLC CPU of the monitor target is the multi PLC system the control PLC of the network unit can be monitored b The other network cannot be monitored c If devices of other stations other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter are monitored monitoring may not be available depending on the PLC CPU of the network system to be monitored Refer to Example 6 5 Monitoring devices of other stations on network If devices of other stations on the network system are monitored display speed will be significantly reduced Therefore monitor link relay B and link register W that are allocated by the network parameter 6 Monitoring devices of the other network a Be sure to designate the routing parameter to the PLC CPU of the connected station b If the other network is monitored display speed of object etc will be significantly reduced 7 Monitor access range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices Example 1 When using b
203. hod 18 3 18 3 18 HITACHI PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 18 2 2 GOT side settings When connecting the GOT and HITACHI PLC you need to set the transmission speed to the GOT according to the setting of the HITACHI PLC used Set the transmission speed on Setup of the GOT s utility function For details of the utility function refer to the GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 Compatible Extended Option Function Manual BUZZER OUTSIDE SPEAKER OFF ON SCREEN SAVE TIME 0 MIN O FREE SCREEN SAVE LIGHT oN LANGUAGE AAs Baud rate 19200 T CHANGE lt Baud rate Choose the GOT side transmission speed Factory set to 19200bps Page 1 2 T lt SELECT CHANGE The utility function can be started by switching power on again after installing the system programs system OS communication driver etc into the GOT After the utility function has started touch the Setup icon to display the setup screen and make settings related to HITACHI PLC connection 18 4 18 4 18 HITACHI PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 18 3 Connection cable 18 3 1 RS 422 cable The connection diagram and connectors for the RS 422 cables between the Link interface unit and the GOT are as follows Connection diagram GOT E D sub 25 pin male metric Cable connection and direction of signal Screw type p s 2 Connec
204. host to GOT 02 H MH ML L H MH ML L H MH ML L MH ML L 03H H L 1 end ACK Transmission from GOT to host 06H p Before execution After execution 20 14 20 14 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT Chapter21 Optional equipment connection 21 1 Bar code reader 21 1 1 System configuration 1 System configuration The following system configuration assumes connection of a bar code reader The numbers 1 to 4 given in the system configurations denote the numbers Lt to 4 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Power supply unit 2 Bar code reader Tb Ss When using the transparent function you cannot connect bar code reader Refer to Section 4 3 for details of the transparent function Refer to the technical bulletin List of valid devices applicable for GOT900 Series 4 RS 232C cable T10 0028 for details of the bar code readers and communication settings usable with the GOT The above technical bulletin can also be browsed on the Mitsubishi Electric FA Equipment Technical Information Service MELFANSweb home page MELFANSweb home page http www MitsubishiElectric co jp melfansweb 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection of a bar code reader Application 5 pM Bar code reader connected GOT Bar code reader which reads
205. i Graphic Operation Terminal Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS pire re 1 REVISION ho ettet tutti bte t etie tete etti edited A 5 INTRODUCTION case PRA obe deuda dern A 7 nini bi e pe a dbi qt xim sib A 7 eE EEE AE AEE EAIN A AEO A 13 Abbreviations and generic terms in this A 14 1 1 Connection supported by tenent senes nnn terrse 1 1 1 2 Overall System 1 7 2 1 PLC CPU that allows 2 1 2 1 1 Applicable CPU list 2 1 2 1 2 PLC CPU that be monitored per connection form ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeaeeeeeeeteneeteaees 2 3 2 2 Monitoring of special function nennen ENERE nnne nnne 2 4 2 3 Access range for monitoring 2 5 2 3 1 Data link system MELSECNET B 1 access range for 2 5 2 3 2 Network system MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 access range for monitoring 2 7 2 3 3 CC Link system
206. ic term of AB50GOT TBD A950GOT SBD A950GOT LBD A950GOT TBD M3 A950GOT SBD M3 and A950GOT LBD M3 Generic term of A953GOT SBD M3 H and A953GOT LBD M3 H Generic term of A9I56GOT A953GOT A951GOT A951GOT Q A950GOT and A950 handy GOT Generic term of 9 5 A9GT QBUS2S A9GT BUSS and A9GT BUS2S Serial communication board Generic term of A9GT RS4 A9GT RS2 and A9GT RS2T Generic term of A9GT QBUS2SU A9GT BUS2SU A9GT BUS2SU A7GT BUSS and A7GT BUS2S Generic term of A7GT J71AP23 A7GT J71AR23 and A7GT J71AT23B Abbreviation of ASGT 80PSC A9GT 0PSC A9GT 60PSC and A9GT 50PSC type transparent protection sheets Abbreviation of A9GT 80LTT A9GT 70LTTB 70 A9GT 70LTS A9GT 50LT type backlights Abbreviation of ASBGT 80STAND A9GT 70STAND and A9GT 50STAND type debug stand Abbreviation of PC card with PCMCIA Ver 2 1 Generic term of ABGTMEM 10MF A9GTMEM 20MF and A9GTMEM 40MF Compact flash PC card compliant with Compact FlashTM Abbreviation of A9GT FNB1M A9GT FNBAM A9GT FNB4M A9GT QFNB A9GT QFNB4M A9GT QFNB8M t ption function memo Generic term of A77GT 96ATT A85GT 95ATT A87GT 96ATT A87GT 97ATT attachments Abbreviation of A8GT TK ten key Panel Abbreviation of 7 bus connector conversion box Abbreviation of A9GT QCNB bus connector conversion box Abbreviation of A9GT 70KBF and A8GT 50KBF type external I O interface unit Abbreviation of A9GT 50PRF type printer interface unit A
207. ication interface 5 computer link unit 1 A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71C24 R2 3 computer link unit 1 2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1S8J71C24 R4 RS 232C cable between computer link unit and GOT Refer to Section 5 4 and fabricate on user side RS 422 cable between computer link unit and GOT 1 For the system configuration on the serial communication unit side refer to the user s manual of the serial communication unit used 2 When the A1SJ71C24 R4 is used and the connection target PLC CPU is the QCPU A mode the monitor able access range is the range of the AnACPU 5 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 5 1 3 Connection with QnACPU large type 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume computer link connection with the QnACPU large type The numbers 1 to 8 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 1 to 8 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance 3 Serial communication unit Within 15m 6 z 6 RS 232C cable Max 15m Serial communication unit 7 RS 422 cable Within 30m nd i Se NN 30m 5 Serial communication unit RS 422 cable Within 200m HII h X hs Max 200m 2 System equipment T
208. ication of devices and initialization programs refer to the instruction manual of the communication board 1 For C200HW COMO02 C200HW COM03 C200HW COM0O5 C200HW COMO06 Device name Value Port Device name Value Port DM6550 to i DM6557 DM6555 0001H DM6558 0000H DM6556 0304H DM6559 0000H 2 For CS1W SCB21 CS1W SCB41 DM32000 8500H DM32010 8500H 0005 to 0005 to 1 DM32011 0008 i 0008H DM32002 0000H DM32012 0000H DM32003 0000H DM32013 0000H DM32008 0000H DM32018 0000H DM32009 0096H DM32019 0096H 1 Choose the written value according to the set transmission speed 4800bps 0005H 19200bps 0007H 9600bps 0006H 38400bps 0008H 12 15 12 15 12 OMRON PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 12 2 5 Initializing communication unit Before using the communication unit write values to the devices as follows and initialize each port of the communication unit For application of devices and initialization programs refer to the instruction manual of the communication board Device name Value device name Value DM30000 8500H DM30010 8500H 0005H to 0005H to DM30001 DM30011 3000 0008H 300 0008H 1 Set the unit number to 00 2 Choose the written value according to the set transmission speed Transmission speed Value Transmission speed Value 4800bps 0005H 19200bps 0007H 9600bps 0006H 38400bps 0008H 12 2 6 GOT side settings When connecting the GOT and OMRON PLC you need to set
209. ide Refer to Section 21 7 3 for details of the fabricating method 21 22 21 22 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 21 7 2 Initial setting only when RS 422 communication function is used When using the RS 422 communication function multidrop communication change the parameter setting of the servo amplifier for that of the RS 422 communication function For details of how to change the parameter setting refer to the manual of the connected servo amplifier 21 7 3 Connection cables 1 21 23 RS 232C cable Use the following cable for connection of the GOT and servo amplifier by the RS 232C communication function MR CPCATCBL3M 3 0m GOT S Servo amplifier Connector DE 9SF N Connector 10120 6000EL Case DE C1 J6 S6 Shell kit 10320 3210 000 Japan Aviation Electronics Industry or equivalent The above cable can also be fabricated on the user side The connection diagram and connectors of the RS 232C cable are shown below a Connection diagram Servo amplifier or interface unit side GOT side FG TXD RXD LG RXD TXD GND LG RTS CTS DSR DTR D SUB 9 pins Half pitch 20 pins Female 21 23 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT b Used connectors and connector covers GOT side connector Name Mosi Manufacturer 10120 6000EL Shell kit 10320 321 0 000 Servo amplifier interface unit side connector Nam
210. iic tren tede ave eae dra Mae Doa na ne ota 3 12 3 2 5 Connection with motion controller CPU Q172CPU 1 3 13 3 2 6 Connection with motion controller CPU A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU S3 3 13 3 2 7 Connection with motion controller CPU A171SHCPU A172SHCPU A173SHCPU S1 3 16 3 3 Initial settings Q mode inn trente 3 18 3 3 1 Connection with QCPU mode nnnm nnne nnne nn nnn nnne 3 18 3 3 2 Connection with other than QCPU sse ennemis 3 20 3 4 Troubleshooting for disabled monitoring sese nennen 3 23 CHAPTER4 CPU DIRECT CONNECTION 4 1to4 13 4 1 System configurations 3 535 i tia ed d e ie 4 1 41 1 Connection with QCPU de decal de de id e cd ede e ed ed 4 1 4 1 2 Connection with QnACPU or 4 2 4 1 3 Connection with FXCPU FXON FX0S FX1N FX1NC FX1S FX2N FX2NC 4 3 4 1 4 Connection with FXCPU FX1 FX2 FX2C series cccccceeeeecceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseaeeeeaeeecaeeesseeessaeessaees 4 5 4 2 Connection Cables etaciidet 4 6 4 3 About transparent function 2 port interface 4 7 4 3 1 About software dedo 4 7 4 3 2 Instructions for using the transparent function
211. int Date Manual Number Revision Jul 2003 SH 080119 1 Section 2 1 1 Section 2 1 2 Partial additions Section 3 1 3 Section 12 2 2 Partial corrections Section 5 1 3 Section 5 2 1 Section 5 4 Jan 2004 SH NA 080119 J Section 4 2 Section 4 3 3 Section 5 2 1 Section 5 4 Section 12 3 2 Section 13 3 2 Section 14 4 Section 15 3 2 Section 16 3 2 Section 17 3 Section 18 3 2 Section 19 3 Section 20 2 1 Section 20 2 2 Partial additions Section 3 2 1 Section 3 2 2 Section 3 2 3 Section 3 2 6 Section 3 2 7 Jun 2004 SH NA 080119 K Partial corrections About Manuals Section 2 1 1 Section 8 1 Section 9 1 Section 10 1 Section 11 1 MODEL CODE change Changed from 13JR20 to 1DM189 Jan 2006 SH NA 080119 L Partial corrections SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 2 1 1 Section 2 1 2 Section 2 3 2 Section 2 3 4 Section 4 3 3 Partial additions Chapter 1 Section 3 2 1 Section 4 3 2 Section 11 2 1 to Section 11 2 3 Section 16 3 1 Section 16 3 2 Japanese Manual Version SH 080114 M This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2000 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing the Mitsubish
212. into the connector of the connected module and tighten the mounting and terminal screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or module Test Operation Instructions 4 DANGER e Before performing test operation bit device on off word device s present value changing timer counter s set value and present value changing buffer memory s present value changing for a user created monitor screen system monitoring special module monitoring or ladder monitoring read the manual carefully to fully understand how to operate the equipment During test operation never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system False output or malfunction can cause an accident Startup Maintenance Instructions lt DANGER e When power is on do not touch the terminals Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction e Do not change the extension stage setting switch or the I O slot setting switch Doing so can cause malfunction e Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening be sure to shut off all phases of external power supply used by the system Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a module failure or malfunction Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction
213. ion base unit is not used Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance Within 2 5m Connection cable Max 2 5m 3 Bus connector conversion box More than 2 5m 7 Connection cable within 2 5m 4 Connection cable Max 32 5m 3 Bus connector conversion box First GOT more than 2 5m d cable Max 2 5m KI within 2 5m 4 Connection cable 7 Connection cable 8 Connection cable Max 2 5m gt 30 32 5 First GOT 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT b When PLC extension base unit is used Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance Within 6 6m i i lii DH Lg 5 Connection cable 9 Connection cable 6 6 gt 1 GOT fin connector TE 0 i conversion box More than Mil cable 6 Connection cable 7 Connection cable Max 6 6m 36 6m First g i within 6 6m 5 Connection cable 9 Connection cable 8 Connection cable 6 6m 36 6 ee 6 6m 5 Connection cable 6 Connection cable 7 Connection cable 8 Connection cable 6 6m 30 36 6 gt BN within 6 6m 5 Connection
214. ion of signal inch screw type b Connector and connector cover Connector for GOT HDEB 9S 05 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD HDE CTH1 4 40 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD PLC CPU side connector 3 pin terminal block Manufactured by Phoenix Contact MKDS1 3 3 5 c Precautions for cable preparation Fabricate the cable within the length of 15m 49 18feet 19 14 19 14 20 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION MELSEC GOT Chapter20 Microcomputer connection Microcomputer connection allows the virtual devices D of the GOT to be monitored from a personal computer microcomputer board PLC or like hereafter referred to as the host by data transfer Device data area Write read command Internal memory 00 000A 0163 0362 S E T RW 0100 T D3 X X 0100 000 DO 02047 0163 0362 Interrupt output Microcomputer board D2047 Refer to the system configuration example which uses the sample program contained in GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 given in Appendices 20 1 System configuration 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume microcomputer connection The numbers 1 to 4 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 4 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want
215. ion with the QCPU A mode The numbers 1 to 6 given in the system configurations denote the numbers to 5 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance communication unit LP 6 RS 422 cable jf 200 gt 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the QnACPU small type Applicati Type mage ication 9 GOT unit Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T Computer link connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 232C communication GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface CV A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS4 Computer link connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRSA4 422 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface 3 Serial communication unit A1SJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24 R2 A1S71QC24N R2 4 Serial communication unit 1 A1SJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24N RS 232C cable between serial communication unit and GOT Refer to Section 5 4 and fabricate on user side RS 422 cable between serial communication unit and GOT 1 For the system configuration on the serial communication unit side refer to the user s manual of the serial communication unit used 5 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION ME
216. isabled for monitoring at the time of bus connection Disabled monitoring NO Does error appear when GOT is started Is communication time out indicated as system alarm YES Refer to GT Designer help and install correct communication driver NO For corrective action refer to GOT user s manual Has correct communication driver been installed Is PLC CPU operating properly NO Do as described in troubleshooting of user s manual of PLC CPU used Is bus connection board fitted properly Refer to bus connection board unit user s manual and fit board properly S communication cable normal without wire break noise etc YES NO Change cable Are cables connected properly Refer to Section 3 2 and make proper y connection YES Is number of extension base units set correctly NO Is I O slot No set correctly Refer to Section 3 3 and make proper setting Refer to Section 3 1 3 and switch power on properly 15 power switched on properly Are signals of GOT assigned to PLC CPU unused Refer to Section 3 1 1 and use signals correctly YES Possible cause is GOT hardware fault Consult your sales representative 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT MEMO 4 CPU DIRECT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT Chapter4 CPU direct connection 4 1 System configura
217. layouts May 2001 SH NA 080119 E Additions Section 2 3 4 Section 3 4 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Section 13 1 5 Chapter 19 Section 3 1 1 Section 3 2 1 Section 3 2 2 Section 3 2 3 Section 3 2 5 Section 3 2 6 Section 3 3 1 Section 5 1 1 Section 5 2 1 Section 12 1 3 Section 12 2 3 Section 12 3 2 Section 13 2 2 Section 13 3 1 Section 13 3 2 Section 1 1 Section 1 2 Section 2 1 Section 2 2 Section 2 3 4 Section 5 1 2 Section 5 1 5 Section 5 1 6 Section 12 1 2 Section 12 2 2 Section 12 3 1 Section 12 3 3 Section 18 3 2 Section 21 5 Section 21 6 Jun 2001 SH NA 080119 F Partial additions Section 2 1 Aug 2001 SH NA 080119 G Partial additions Section 2 1 Section 2 3 2 Section 4 3 2 Section 4 3 3 Section 21 2 1 Section 3 2 5 May 2002 SH 080119 Section 21 7 Section 1 1 Section 12 1 8 Section 16 2 Section 16 3 1 Section 16 3 2 Section 2 1 Section 2 3 1 Section 2 3 2 Section 3 2 1 Section 3 2 2 Section 3 2 4 Section 3 2 6 Section 3 2 7 Section 4 1 3 Section 4 3 Section 4 3 3 Section 5 1 2 Section 5 2 1 Section 5 2 2 Section 7 1 Section 10 1 Section 11 1 Section 11 2 1 Section 12 1 7 Section 12 2 2 Section 12 3 1 Section 12 3 2 Section 16 1 Section 21 1 1 Section 21 1 4 Section 21 1 6 Section 21 5 1 Section 21 6 1 Appendix 1 3 The manual number is given the bottom left of the back cover Pr
218. llowing system configurations assume connection of servo amplifiers The numbers 1 to 6 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 1 to 6 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions System Configuration Servo amplifier When only one servo amplifier is connected RS 232C cable Max 15m 3 RS 232C RS 422 RS 232C 6 RS 422 cable Converter cable When multiple servo amplifiers 3 2 to 32 are 30 Multidrop communication up to 32 servo amplifiers can be connected 1 Connect the GOT side connector of the cable to the RS 232C interface at the bottom of the GOT used for downloading the monitor screen data 2 Connect the servo amplifier side connector of the cable to CN3 3 As the servo amplifier to be monitored select one from the 32 servo amplifiers 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection of servo amplifiers No Application E GOT connected with servo amplifier CP MR J2M A series RS 232C cable between GOT and converter Use the cable that matches the used RS 232C RS 422 converter RS 422 cable between converter and servo amplifier Refer to Section 21 7 3 and fabricate on user side 1 The RS 232C cable can also be fabricated on the user s
219. llowing versions of the motion controller CPU Q Series 1 Products with the main unit OS of Version 00 2 Products whose main units have the following serial numbers indicated on the rating plate on the CPU module side Q172CPU serial numbers Q173CPU serial numbers J 2 SPECIFICATION MELSEC GOT 2 Other PLC C200H C200Ha Series C200HX C200HG C200HE C1000H C2000H CV500 CV1000 CVM1 CPU01 CVM1 CPU11 CVM1 CPU21 CS1 CJ1G CJ1M Sharp PLC Toshiba PLC GL60H GL70H GL 120 GL 130 2 CP 9300MS MP 920 930 940 9200 8 SLC500 20 SLC500 30 SLC500 40 SLC500 Series SLC5 01 SLC5 02 SLC5 03 SLC5 04 SLC5 05 1761 L10BWA 1761 L10BWB 1761 L16AWA 1761 L16BWA 1761 L16BWB 1761 L16BBB 1761 L32AWA 1761 L32BWA 1761 L32BWB 1761 L32BBB 1761 L32AAA 1761 L20AWA 5A 1761 L20BWA 5A 1761 L20BWB 5A MicroLogix1500 1764 LSP Series JW 22CU JW 31CUH JW 32CUH JW 33CUH JW 70CUH JW 100CUH PROSEC T Series 3 T2 PU224 Type PROSEC V Series 3000 3 SIMATIC 57 300 Series SIMATIC 57 400 Series H 302 CPU2 03H H 702 CPU2 07H H 1002 CPU2 10H H 2002 CPU2 20H H 4010 CPU3 40H H 300 CPU 03Ha H 700 CPU 07Ha H 2000 CPU 20Ha n H 200 CPU 02H CPE 02H H 250 CPU21 02H H 252 CPU22 02H H 200 to 252 Series H 252B CPU22 02HB H 252C CPU22 02HC CPE22 02HC H 28DR H 40DR H 64DR H 20DT H 40DT H 64DT HL 40DR HL 64DR
220. ly CH2 is usable For the operation method of GX Developer refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual Channel Where GOT Is Settings Connected 9 Switch setting for 1 0 and intelligent functional module Input format HEX se Type Modelname Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 4 RETI S eI a AT EY a o 0 intel 0971624692 on 000 SEO EET EE DRE Switch setting for 1 0 and intelligent functional module Input format Sot Tye Modelname Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 mr ae RE ae 1 00 0 0471624692 1 000 0000 slg Sd A When using the GOT connected to the serial communication unit of function version B you can use CH1 and CH2 of the serial communication unit together Hence you can use the GOT and GX Developer or similar peripheral device or two GOTs connected to one serial communication unit Note that only one GOT can be connected to the serial communication module of function version A 5 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION MELSEC GOT b When connecting to AJ71QC24 N R2 AQ Mode switch for CH1 Transmission specification switch for CH1 When set to
221. m and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness
222. m configuration on the serial communication unit side refer to the user s manual of the serial communication unit used 2 When the AJ71C24 S8 is used and the connection target PLC CPU is the AnUCPU the monitorable access range is the range of the AnACPU 5 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 5 1 6 Connection with ACPU small type 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume computer link connection with the ACPU small type The numbers 1 to 6 given in the system configurations denote the numbers Lt to 5 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance Within 15m Within 200m 6 RS 422 cable Max 200m 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the ACPU small type Image No Application 9 GOT unit Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T po Computer link connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 with built in communication interface 5 A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT Computer link connected RS 422 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface 3 Computer link unit 1 2 A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71C24 R2 4 Computer link unit 1 2 A1SJ71UC24
223. mple Always ON FROM HO 4 48 KI Remote input RX read Initial setting execution program Refer to 1 B Elie ovis a Ne E status flag Command M58 c k H ov 0100 Command data storage MOV D101 Transfers master station RWwo 1 To HiEO 0100 GOT request flag ON command execution SET 14s GOT complete flag M48 ON at processing complete RST M148 Reads to PLC CPU FROM HO H2E0 0200 Always ON TO H163 K4M148 Remote output RY write 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 4 Continuous write command a Continuous write command This is command to write data from a specified number of points of remote registers to the specified head GOT internal device b Command format Transfer Direction Write data RWwm Higher byte 4 Continuous write setting When the occupied points are 2 stations 1 to 6 Points to be written to the GOT internal device RWwm Lower byte When the occupied points are 4 stations Master station GOT plea p 1 to 14 Points to be written to the GOT internal device 0 to 1023 Head GOT internal device numbers to be written RWwm 2 to RWwn Stores the data to be written to the GOT internal device GOT Masterstation RWm to RWm F C NNNM c Communication overview When writing remote register data to the GOT internal device GD10
224. n the occupied points are 2 stations 1 to 6 Points to be written to the GOT internal device RWwm Lower byte When the occupied points are 4 stations Master station GOT 1 to 14 Points to be written to the GOT internal device 0 to 1023 GOT internal device numbers to be RWwm 1 to RWwn E regis tered Storage for the setting mentioned above GOT Master station RWmtoRWm F c Communication overview Refer to 7 7 Monitor request command a Monitor request command This is a command to always read the data in the GOT internal device registered by the monitor register command execution to the remote register Execute the monitor request command after the monitor register command is executed b Command format Transfer Direction Write data Master staton GOT RWwm 1toRWwn F e i y O GOT Master station RWmioRWm F 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT c Communication overview When always reading the data in the GOT internal device GD100 200 and 300 to the remote register Master station GOT PLC CPU non __ remote register remote register Monitor register TO FROM Monitor requeset 4 command GOT internal device 1 Store the monitor register command data in the master station s remote register RWw 2 T
225. n with the JW 22CU JW 32CUH or JW 33CUH Application mum Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT _ A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T Sharp PLC connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 232C communication GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT _ A9GT RS4 Sharp PLC connected RS 422 A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS4 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface RS 232C cable between CPU and GOT RS 422 cable between CPU Refer to Section 15 4 and fabricate on user side and GOT RS 422 cable between link unit and GOT 15 2 15 2 15 SHARP PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 15 1 3 Connection with JW 50CUH 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configuration and connection conditions assume connection with the JW 50CUH The numbers 4 to 3 given in the system configurations denote the numbers to 3 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance Changes with 2 Link unit the connection FPP J 3 RS 422 cable target CPU specifications 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the JW 50CUH Applicati ication i iig GOT unit S
226. nd remote device stations PLC CPU MO to M15 M16 to M31 M32 to M47 M48 to M63 M100 to M115 M116 to M131 M132 to M147 Address EOH E1H E2H E3H Address 160H 161H 162H 163H Address 1E0H 1E1H 1E2H 1E3H 1E4H 1E5H 1E6H 1E7H Address 2E0H 2E1H 2E2H 2E3H 2E4H 2E5H 2E6H 2E7H Master station Remote input RX RX00 to RXOF RX10 to RX1F RX20 to RX2F RX30 to RX3F Remote output RY RYOO to RYOF RY10 to RY1F RY20 to RY2F Remote register RWw Write area Remote register RWr Read area Remote device starion GOT Remote input RX RX00 to RXOF RX10 to RX1F RX20 to RX2F RX30 to RX3F Remote output RY RY00 to RYOF RY10 to RY1F RY20 to RY2F Remote register RWw Write area Remote register RWr Read area 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 3 Examples of created monitor screen data The following are the monitor screen data examples of the A970GOT A8GT J61BT15 remote device station Refer to the help function of GT Designer for the way to set each object function a Common setting PLC Type GOT Type Base Screen Switching Device MELSEC QnA Q_ A97 GOT GT SoftGOT GD100 b Base screen No 1 settings To main menu To o
227. nection with QCPU Q mode 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume computer link connection with the QCPU mode The numbers 1 to 6 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 6 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance 3 Serial communication unit LY Modem interface unit o Within 15m li 5 232 cable _ C L 1GOT J le Max 15m u VP 8 RS 422 cable Within 1200m W n 1200 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the QCPU mode Type Image No Application GOT unit Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T po Computer link connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 with built in communication interface Computer link connected RS 422 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface Serial communication unit 1 QJ71C24 QJ71C24 R2 Modem interface unit QJ71CMO 4 Serial communication unit 1 QJ71C24 RS 232C cable between serial communication unit and GOT Refer to Section 5 4 and fabricate on user side RS 422 cable between serial communication unit and GOT
228. nectors at both ends of the cable to the control box or like Connect both ground wires to control box or like 6 The A8GT C100EXSS 1 A8GT C200EXSS 1 A8GT C300EXSS 1 cable consists of the A8GT EXCNB 0 5m and A8GT C100BS 10m C200BS 20m C300BS 30m respectively The length of the A8GT EXCNB 0 5m need not be considered when calculating the cable length 3 15 3 15 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 3 2 7 Connection with motion controller CPU A171SHCPU A172SHCPU A173SHCPU 51 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume bus connection with motion controller CPU A171SHCPU A172SHCPU A173SHCPU S1 The numbers 1 8 given the system configurations denote the numbers 8 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Up to three GOTs may be connected A173SHCPU S1 only Use the A168B as the PLC extension base unit to which the GOT is connected Select the connection cables whose lengths satisfy the conditions of the maximum distance depending on the connection conditions Installing a single connected GOT more than 33m away requires the bus connector conversion box 3 Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance Z7 Within 30m 4 Connection cable Max 30m 1GOT
229. ner Remote input to X7FF Remote output YO to Remote register writing area WwO to WwFF Remote register reading area Wr0 to WrFF 2 Monitoring PLC CPU devices of other stations For device name and device number refer to the GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 Reference Manual 4 When using CC Link connection via G4 Access range Master station local station can be monitored b Setting NW number and station number 1 When monitoring master station NW number 0 PLC station number Host other station number O 2 Monitoring local station NW number 0 PLC station number Other station number 1 to 64 c Setting device name and device number For the device names and device numbers refer to the GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 Reference Manual 2 SPECIFICATION MELSEC GOT 2 3 4 Access range for monitoring when using Ethernet connection 1 Access range The Ethernet unit specified in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer can be monitored Communication via MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET B or MELSECNET II cannot be made HL fl Freund HU Gateway Router etc MELSECNET 10 etc While the GOT is handled as a host in MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET II or CC Link connection the station Ethernet module set as a host in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer is handled as a host in Ethernet connection 2 Various settings Refer to Section 11 2 for
230. nit used and fully understand the contents During communication with the Ethernet module do not power off the GOT or disconnect the cable Doing so can cause COM ERR in the Ethernet module due to a communication stop The version of the compatible software changes depending on the hardware version of the Ethernet communication module A9GT J71E71 T Use the software compatible with the hardware version of the used Ethernet communication module 1 Hardware version of Ethernet communication module When using the Ethernet communication module A9GT J71E71 T whose hardware version is E or later install all the OSs which are stored on GT Works Version 5 26C or later or GT Designer Version 5 26C or later into the GOT Hardware Version of Software Version Ethernet Communication GT Works Version 5 P to Y Module GT Designer Version 5P to Y GT Designer Version 5 26C or later NENNEN or earlier O e or later i Usable Unusable 2 How to confirm hardware version Confirm the hardware version of the Ethernet communication module on the rating plate of the product 2 MITSUBISHI ETHERNET INTERFACE UNIT MODEL A9GT J71E71 T MACADD E jw POWER DATE 0206 E E MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN BD992C091H03 Hardware version Rating plate 3 How to confirm software version Confirm the software version of GT Works Version 5 or GT Designer Version
231. nnect the cable to the system equipment e g the Ethernet unit hub or transceiver according to the Ethernet network System used 8 When multiple devices including GOT on the network are connected to the same segment the load on the network increases and the communication performance between the GOTs and PLCs may degrade The communication performance could be improved by taking the following measures Using a switching hub Using the high speed 100BASE TX 100Mbps for PLCs and other devices except for GOTs Decreasing the monitoring device points of GOT 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the PLC CPU Type Image Application GOT unit Ethernet communication unit 985 A97 GOT A960GOT Ethernet connected GOT A9GT J71E71 T A956WGOT 56 QJ71E71 QJ71E71 B2 AJ71QE71 AJ71QE71 B2 Data link unit A1SJ71QE71 B5 AJ71E71 S3 15 71 71 5 53 AJ71E71N B2 A1SJ71E71N B2 A1SJ71E71N B5ST AJ71QE71N BST A1SJ71QE71N B2 3 10 cable 1 Twisted pair cable UTP 1 The 10BASE T cable that may be connected to the GOT is a twisted pair cable UTP For details of the cable refer to the manual of the Ethernet unit used 11 2 QJ71E71 100 AJ71QE71 B5 15 71 71 2 53 AJ71E71N BST AJ71QE71N B2 A1SJ71QE71N B5T 11 2 11 ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 11 2 How to set up the Etherne
232. nnection via 4 10 1 Computer link connection 5 1 Connection to bar code reader 21 1 Connection to external I O equipment 21 8 Connection to personal computer 21 19 Connection to 21 6 Connection to servo amplifiers 21 26 Connection to video camera 21 24 Direct connection to 4 1 Ethernet 11 2 s iiie 18 1 Matsushita Electric Works PLC 19 1 MELSECNET connection data link system 6 1 MELSECNET connection network 7 1 Microcomputer connection 20 1 Omron PLC 12 1 Sharp PLC connection 15 1 SIEMENS PLC connection 17 1 Toshiba PLC 16 1 Yaskawa PLC connection 13 1 Connection cable Allen Bradley PLC connection 14 4 Computer link connection 5 16 Connection to bar code reader 21 3 Connection to external I O equipment 21 10 Index 1 Connection to personal computer 21 25 Connection to
233. ns the specifications general system configuration component devices part names option unit loading methods installation and wiring methods maintenance and inspection methods and error codes of A950GOT A951GOT A953GOT A956GOT unit SH 080018 1DM103 Available as option GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 compatible Extended e Option Functions Manual Provides the specifications of the utility system monitoring ladder monitoring special function unit monitoring network monitoring functions list editor functions motion monitoring function and servo amplifier monitoring function available for the GOT A900 series and how to operate the dedicated monitor screen SH 080118 1DM185 Available as option GT SoftGOT Version 6 Operating Manual Describes the system configuration screen makeup and usage of GT SoftGOT Available as option SH 080156 1DM193 Abbreviations and generic terms in this manual Communica tion board Communica tion unit Option unit Abbreviations and generic terms used in this manual are described as follows Abbreviations and generic terms A985GOT V A985GOT A975GOT A970GOT 97 A960GOT A956WGOT A956GOT A953GOT A951GOT A951GOT Q A950GOT A950 handy GOT A95 GOT Bus connection board Bus connection unit Data link unit Network unit CC Link communication unit Protection sheet Backlight Debug stand PC c
234. number 0 Station number Local station 2 When monitoring other stations other than B and W other network ae eS ee ee ee ee ee waw queo ee eee A055 a a ee ee a 1 When monitoring the data link system designate the NW number as 0 How to read the 2 Other 2 table i 7 A NW number Station number 2 SPECIFICATION MELSEC GOT Example 5 When using MELSECNET 10 connection When using MELSECNET 10 connection the other network cannot be monitored 1 3 Monitor access range for other station devices other than B and W to be Mode o if 5 1 2 1 5 1 A Accessible within the range of AnA GOT 1 3 T C 0 to 255 R ER ZR cannot be monitored X Not accessible POINT Designating NW number and station number for setting monitor device For monitoring devices B VE and W that are allocated 1 Monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by network parameter by the network parameter the local NW number 0 Station number Local device number if 2 Monitoring other stations other than B and W designating devices allocated to other station fi vintion to Q Q Mode If not display speed will connected How to read the table 0 Other 2 be reduced to GOT e a 1 c2 1 1 7 1 3 _
235. o 12 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 12 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance 6 RS 422 cable Within 10m E Within 31 5m 4 Extended function board 7 RS 422 Within 10m cable rm 10 0m Max 10 0m 5 Extended function board 1 9 RS 232C E Within 15m cable B 15 0 4 Extended function board i gt adaptor 8 422 cable Within 31 5m P g d 31 5 3 2 port interface unit L2 RS 422 cable 8 RS 422 cable Within 31 5m ES SJ CO 31 5 gt 4 CPU DIRECT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the FXCPU FXo FXos FX1N FX1s FX2N FX2NC series M Type Image No Application GOT unit Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT 9 54 CPU direct connected RS 422 A956WGOT communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT CPU direct connected RS A956WGOT 232C communication GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface Unit for simultaneous connection of GOT and peripheral e g A6
236. o main menu To operating command screen To production situation screen No Object Function to Be Set Setting Operation Bit SET X1 RX1 to M1 Touch key function Bit RST to MO Settings made to switch to base screen No 2 Bit RST X2 RX2 to M2 Bit SET X2 RX2 to M2 Touch key function Bit RST to MO Settings made to switch to base screen No 3 Bit RST X1 RX1 to M1 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT c Base screen No 2 settings Operating command screen Production 7 Parts situation Line1 1 Main 8 Line2 2 VAS Line3 3 1 2 3 Start up Start up Start up 4 5 6 Object Function to Be Set Setting Numerical input function Write device WrO to D200 RAS Settings made to store the values entered with the EE Numerical input function Write device Wri to D201 Ae Numerical input function Write device Wr2 to D202 4 Touch key function Bit alternate RX3 to Settings made to store the ON OFF information 5 Touch key function Bit alternate X4 RX4 to M4 entered with the touch key function into M200 numerical input function into D200 D202 Bit alternate X5 RX5 to M5 M201 Bit SET X2 RX2 to M2 Touch key function Bit RST to MO Settings made t
237. o prepare them 1 Type FP5 MD41 A Operation panel desktop type FP5 MD41 B Operation panel enclosure mounted type Kanaden Corp 2 Order and inquiry Orders and inquiries for the operation panel should be made to your shop 21 13 21 13 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 21 4 PC card 21 4 1 System configurations 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations assume loading of a PC card The numbers 4 to 3 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 3 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions System Configuration When SRAM type PC card is used 2 Memory card interface unit 2 Connection cable gt gt T lt 1 yd Max 0 5m When flash PC card is used When compact flash PC card is used 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for loading of a PC card Applicati Type m ication 299 GOT unit Memory card interface unit A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT PC card loaded GOT card loade with built in memory card interface A1SD59J MIF The cable A85GT CO5H 0 5m for connection of the A1S D57J MIF and GOT is separately required PC card loaded GOT A956WGOT A95 GOT A956WGOT with built in memory card interface 3 PC card l
238. o switch to base screen No 3 Bit RST X1 RX1 to M1 Bit SET XO to MO Touch key function Bit RST X1 RX1 to M1 Settings made to switch to base screen No 1 Bit RST X2 RX2 to M2 d Base screen No 3 settings Production situation screen Parts A Parts B Line1 1 2 Line2 3 4 Line3 5 6 Line1 Line2 Line3 start up start up start up Production Main situation screen 10 11 2 Numerical display function Monitor device Ww2 RWw2 from D102 dip ie ula Settings made to display the values stored in Touch key function Monitor device Ww4 a from D104 D101 D106 Moor device Was WS fom 0108 6 Touch key function Monitor device Ww6 ET from D106 Monitor device YO RYO from M100 Settings made to display on the GOT the line Lamp display function Monitor device Y1 RY1 from M101 operating statuses ON OFF output to the remote Lamp display function Monitor device Y2 RY2 from M102 station Bit SET X1 RX1 to M1 Bit RST to MO Settings made to switch to base screen No 2 Bit RST X2 RX2 to M2 Bit SET to MO Bit RST X1 RX1 to M1 Settings made to switch to base screen No 1 Bit RST X2 RX2 to M2 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT e Sequence program example Refer to the Master Module User s
239. oaded GOT 21 14 21 14 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 21 5 Video camera 21 5 1 System configurations 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations assume loading of a PC card The numbers 1 to 8 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 8 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions System Configuration b Connection 3 Video camera 4 6 Connection Connection cable 3 Video camera 8 Connection 7 7 Connection 3 Video camera o For RGB input p E cable a 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection of a video camera Applicati Type mage ication 9 GOT unit Input interface unit 80 4 video A9GT 80V4R1 video RGB y A9GT 80R1 RGB T A T V Bee rote 78299 A9GT 80V4R1 video RGB Video camera 1 Video input GOT A985GOT V Products on the market 4 Vision sensor cable between GOT and video camera im Refer to Section 21 5 2 and fabricate on user side Connection cable between vision sensor and video Refer to Section 21 5 3 and fabricate on user side camera 21 15 21 15 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT e When using the AIGT 80V4R1 with the A985GOT TBA V u
240. of a high frequency coaxial cable The following are coaxial cable specifications Po XxX NI N N N N N N BE 9 SRR o 5 5 5 5 5 KS xO bO 4 Construction Internal conductive Insulating material material External conductive Sneath material Cable diameter 5 4mm 0 21 7 4mm 0 29in Allowable bending redius 22mm 0 87in or more 30mm 1 18in or more Internal conductive material diameter 0 5mm 0 02 in Annealed copper wire 0 8mm 0 08in Annealed copper wire Insulating material diameter 3 1mm 0 12in Polyethy lene 4 9mm 0 19in Polyethy lene T 3 8mm 0 15in 5 6mm 0 22in Extermnal conductive material diameter i Single annealed copper wire mesh Single annealed copper wire mesh connector plug for 2 connector plug for 5C 2V PP S BNC P 3 Ni CAU is recommended BNC P 5 Ni CAU is recommended 2 Connector and connector cover GOT connector Use the BNC connector as the GOT connector The following is how to connect the BNC connector and coaxial cable a Structures of BNC connector and coaxial cable Parts of the BNC connector Structure of the coaxial cable Outer conductor Outer sheath E Nut Washer Gasket AT material Plug shell Ze Clamp Contact Internal conductive material 21 17 21 17 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT b Connecting the
241. of the GOT LANGUAGE 1 to 7 Set the STAGE No Factory set to 7 QBUS STAGE T STAGE 17 7 QBUS SLOT No SLOT 0 9 QBUS SLOT No Set the empty SLOT No where the GOT will be assigned T e sELECT CHANGE 0 to 9 Set the empty SLOT No Factory set to 0 For the way to set the I O assignment refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual Setting examples u 1 2 3 4 Power XIV This assignment 0 10 20 30 40 example assumes that the modules loaded to the PLC 6 7 8 10 11 12 CPU are all 16 points 9 XIV XIV XIV rv XY 50 60 70 80 90 0 STAGE No 1 15 16 17 Power XIY supply module FO 100 110 Q65B STAGE No 2 1 2 3 4 5 STAGE No 3 STAGENo 3 STAGENo 3 STAGENo 3 STAGE 3 SLOT No 0 SLOT No 1 SLOT No 2 SLOT No 3 SLOT No 4 Image of extension stage for GOT connection as viewed from PLC CPU 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 0 poner X Y X Y XI Y X Y Xi Y xr Y STAGE 3 120 130 140150 1601170180 190 A0 1BO 16 points x10 slots 1 2 3 4 5 HF By choosing PLC parameter I O assignment on GX Developer you can set the unnecessary slots empty 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT
242. on board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 A953GOT with built in communication interface A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface Refer to Section 13 3 and fabricate on user side 13 5 13 YASKAWA PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 13 2 Initial settings 13 2 1 PLC side settings When connecting the GOT and Yaskawa Electric PLC make the following communication and port settings with the peripheral tool For details of the setting method refer to the instruction manual of the Yaskawa Electric PLC MEMOBUS RTU Data length EVEN Communication speed transmission speed 4800bps 9600bps 1 9200bps 38400bps The upper limit that may be set changes with the Yaskawa Electric PLC used 13 2 2 GOT side settings When connecting the GOT and Yaskawa Electric PLC you need to set the transmission speed to the GOT according to the setting of the Yaskawa Electric PLC used Set the transmission speed on Setup of the GOT s utility function For details of the utility function refer to the GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 Compatible Extended Option Function Manual DUTSIDE SPEAKER SCREEN SAVE TIME 0 MIN O FREE SCREEN SAVE LIGHT OFF LANGUAGE S Baud rate 19200 1 CHANGE START UP TIME 0 1 6 0 255 SEND MESSAGE DELAY 0 0 x10ms 0 30 T
243. on board or cable may keep the outputs on or off An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction e If a communication fault including cable disconnection occurs during monitoring on the GOT communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative For bus connection The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT inoperative For other than bus connection The GOT becomes inoperative A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction N CAUTION e Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main circuit power or other wiring Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction Mounting Instructions lt DANGER e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT main unit to from the panel Not doing so can cause a module failure or malfunction e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the communication boar
244. on number switch Designates the network unit as follows Setting differs between optical loop system and coaxial bus system Optical loop system When using A7GT J71LP23 Stations 1 to 64 Coaxial bus system When using A7GT J71BR13 Stations 1 to 32 4 Mode switch When using network set this switch to ONLINE 7 3 Self diagnosis test Self diagnosis test checks the hardware of the data link unit and for breakage of the link cable By using the mode switch of the data link unit the following 10 modes can be selected For test procedures and analysis of the results refer to the reference manual of MELSECNET 10 network system Switch Description Contents setting za Loop test Main loop Checks lines after all stations are connected Stations other than test object is set to ONLINE before the check Only for optical loop system Station to station test mode 5 Checks the line between 2 stations The station with more Main station recent number is set as the main station and the one with older number as sub station 4 Loop test Sub loop Station to station test mode Sub station Checks the hardware including transmission reception circuit Self turning test by using a single network unit Checks the hardware including transmission reception circuit Internal self turning test by using a single network unit aa Hardware test This mode checks the hardware in the network unit
245. or excluding the initial setting command monitor request command and always write request command is executed After each command processing is complete the GOT complete flag turns on When the GOT request flag is turned off the GOT complete flag turns off as well To instruction Command data storage ON GOT request flag Command processing Command GOT compete flag b Initial data setting complete flag RX n 3 9 RX n 7 9 and initial data setting request flag RY n 3 RY n 7 9 By turning on the initial data setting request flag the initial setting command to monitor using the GOT internal device is executed When the initial setting command processing is complete the initial data setting complete flag turns on When the initial data setting request flag is turned off the initial data setting complete flag turns off as well To instruction Command data storage ON Initial data setting request flag Command processing Initial setting command Initial data setting compete flag When performing dedicated command monitor the initial data setting request flag must be turned ON to execute the initial setting command Refer to Section 9 2 5 1 for the initial setting command 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT c GOT monitor request flag RY n 3 1 RY n 7 1 When the GOT monitor request flag is on the data in the G
246. or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Cent
247. ot doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault e Before loading or unloading the PC card to or from the GOT set the memory card access switch to the OFF position Not doing so can cause the PC card data to be corrupted Wiring Instructions gt DANGER e Before starting wiring be sure to shut off all phases of external power supply used by the system Not doing so may cause an electric shock product damage or malfunction N CAUTION e Always earth the FG LG and earth terminals of the GOT power supply section to the protective earth conductor Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction Correctly wire the power supply module on the after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product Not doing so can cause a fire or failure e Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or module e Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the module Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction Plug the bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected module until it clicks After plugging check that it has been inserted snugly Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault Plug the communication cable
248. perating command screen To production situation screen No Object Function to Be Set 1 Touch key function Base screen switching fixed value 2 Setting made to switch to base screen No 2 2 Touch key function Base screen switching fixed value 3 Setting made to switch to base screen No 3 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT c Base screen No 3 settings Operating command screen Parts A Parts B Line1 1 2 Line2 3 4 Line3 5 6 Motor start up switch Swich1 Swich2 Swich3 Swich4 7 Swich5 Swich6 Swich7 Swich8 Li L1 1 2 3 Production Main start up start up start up situation screen 8 9 10 11 12 Settings made to store the values entered with the numerical input function into GD200 GD205 Switch 1 GD250 60 Switch 2 GD250 b1 Switch 3 GD250 b2 Settings made to store the ON OFF information entered with the touch key function into the specified bits b0 to b7 of GD250 Touch key function Switch 4 GD250 b3 Switches 1 to 8 Switch 5 GD250 b4 Switch 6 GD250 b5 Switch 7 GD250 b6 Switch 8 GD250 b7 Touch key function Bit alternate GD255 60 Settings made to store the ON OFF information Touch key function Bit alternate GD255 b1 entered with the to
249. printer cable may also be fabricated on user side Refer to Section 21 2 2 for details of the fabricating method 21 2 21 2 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 21 2 2 Connection cable Connection diagram and connectors of the printer cable between the GOT and the printer are shown below 1 Connection diagram E EU Cable connection and signal direction CHASIS GND CHASIS GND ACKNLG ACKNLG DATA6 DATA 6 DATAS NC INIT DATA1 NC 36 INT a DATA1 2 3 PRX CEN 2 Connector to be used GOT connector 3210 000 Sumitomo 3M Ltd 10120 6000EL Printer connector Use the connector applicable to the printer to be used 3 Precautions for cable preparation Prepare the cable of a length within 3 m 9 84 feet or the within the specification range of the printer to be used 21 3 21 3 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 21 3 External I O equipment 21 3 1 System configurations The system configuration differs between when an external I O unit is used for input only and when external I O units are used for I O 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configuration assumes connection of a printer The numbers 1 to 9 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 19 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when
250. r 13 SIEMENS PLC Allen Bradley PLC Refer to Chapter 14 Hitachi PLC Matsushita PLC Sharp PLC Refer to Chapter 15 MELSEC GOT QCPU mode 24 QnACPU ACPU large small Master station Control station Normal station Master Local unit Master Local station Ethernet unit Mating device on Ethernet Microcomputer board Third party PLC Refer to Chapter 16 Refer to Chapter 17 Refer to Chapter 18 Refer to Chapter 19 1 9 MELSEC GOT 5 A951GOT A951GOT Q Bus connection QCPU Q mode Refer to Chapter 3 QnACPU ACPU large small Bus connection Refer to Chapter 3 6 950 CPU direct connection Refer to Chapter 4 QCPU Q A mode FXCPU QnACPU ACPU large small A950GOT QCPU Q mode QnACPU Computer link connection Refer to Chapter 5 HE QCPU A mode ACPU Hm Master local unit E E function peripheral connection unit Master 5 4 93 _ H ee eee Local station i 0 Microcomputer connection Refer to Chapter 20 Z Third party PLC connection Refer to Chapters 10 PLC Microcomputer board Third party rh PLC Omron PLC Refer to Chapter 12 01 _
251. r When 4 stations are set station RYn0 to RY n 6 F 112 points RWrm to RWrm F 16 points RX 1 The data is stored in the GOT s remote input RX and remote register RWr Touch switch function numeric value input function etc 2 By link scan the data is stored in the remote input and remote register allocated to the master station GOT Collected for each link scan 3 Remote input and remote register data are read to the PLC CPU The GOT can input e g touch key function data to only the remote inputs RX and remote registers RWr assigned the master station It cannot input e g touch key function or display e g lamp display function data to the other remote inputs RX and remote registers RWr 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION 2 MELSEC GOT Dedicated command monitor method The remote register write area data is stored in the GOT internal device using dedicated commands and monitoring is performed Refer to Section 9 2 5 for the dedicated commands When the GOT internal device write command is executed PLC CPU GOT Internal decice GD Master station Write command Write data1 Operating Information data RW Write command White data White data Write data2 Production quantity data Repea
252. rameter cannot be monitored 2 Normal stations on the network cannot be monitored 3 Stations on the other network cannot be monitored 2 CPU direct connection computer link connection a If connected to multi PLC system 1 Access range is as described in 1 a b If connected to QCPU Mode QnACPU 1 Access range is as described in 1 b c If connected to QCPU Mode AnUCPU 1 Control station on the network and all normal stations can be monitored When devices of other stations other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter are monitored monitoring is not available if the PLC CPU to be monitored is QCPU Q Mode OnACPU 2 If connected to an intermediate station use data link parameter Effective unit number to access other stations to designate the unit number that is connected to the network to be monitored d If connected to ANACPU AnNCPU 1 Control stations on the network can be monitored If the PLC CPU of the control station is QCPU Q Mode QnACPU devices other than B and W that are allocated by the network parameter cannot be monitored 2 Normal stations on the network cannot be monitored 3 The other network cannot be monitored 2 SPECIFICATION MELSEC GOT 3 CC Link connection intelligent device station CC Link connection via G4 Connected stations can be monitored When the connected station is the multi PLC system CPU No 1 to No 4 can be monitored Ot
253. ration The system shown below was used in this system configuration example ES A975GOT A9GT RS2 IBM PC AT or 100 compatible Microsoft Visual C Ver 5 0 Appendix 1 2 GOT side communication setting and monitor screen setting details 1 Communication setting The communication setting of the GOT unit is indicated below Use the utility function setup to make communication setting for microcomputer connection Microcomputer connection transmission speed 19200bps Microcomputer connection protocol 2 Monitor screen setting details The monitor screen setting details are indicated below a Common setting Screen switching device base screen D20 Pe App 1 APPENDICES MELSEC GOT b Monitor screen images Base screen 1 1 Numerical display function Numerical display setting for monitoring the device value of D21 The device value is incremented only while Sample 123 1 Screen 1 is being displayed 2 Touch key 1 Key used to switch the screen to Sample Screen 2 2 Touching this key switches the base screen to Sample Screen 2 Sample Screen 1 Base screen 2 3 Lamp indication function Indicates the device status of D22 b0 with the lamp 4 Touch key 2 Alternate key which changes the status of D22 b0 3 5 Touch key 3 Key used to switch the screen to Sample Screen 1 Touching this key switches the base screen to Sample Screen 1 Sample Screen 2
254. rd 5 A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT 9 54 CPU direct connected RS 422 n A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS4 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface Unit for simultaneous connection FX 2PIF 1 2 of GOT and peripheral e g A6GPP A7GPP ATPHP to FXCPU RS 422 cable between FXCPU 3 AC30R4 25P 3 0m AC100R4 25P 10 0m AC300R4 25P 30 0m RS 422 cable between FXCPU and 2 port interface FX 422CAB 0 3m unit RS 422 cable between 2 port 5 AC30R4 25P 3 0m AC100R4 25P 10 0m AC300R4 25P 30 0m interface unit and GOT 1 The FX 2PIF is used to connect the GOT and FXCPU peripheral e g AGGPP AGPHP A7GPP A7PHP simultaneously Refer to the FXCPU manual for the usable models and system configurations for connection of the FXCPU series peripherals 2 When connecting the GOT to the FX2N series via the FX 2PIF use the FX 2PIF unit of Ver 3 0 or later 4 5 4 5 4 CPU DIRECT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 4 2 Connection Cables This section gives the connection diagrams and connectors of the RS 232C cables which are used to connect the GOT and function extension board when the FX1N FX1S or FX2N series is used 1 Connection diagram Function Extension Board Side Cable connection and direction of signal Signal name GOT Side DR 6 Sui es
255. rd 1 2 unit 1 2 A9GT QBUSS 4 A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT AQGT QBUS2S A9GT QBUS2SU 4 A956WGOT A9GT 5OWOBUSS A9GT QBUS2SU Bus connected GOT at termination A956GOT I AeGT GBUS2SU A951GOT Q A9GT QBUS2SU 4 with built in communication interface CNN IT A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT QBUS2S 2 Bus connected GOT at midpoint A956WGOT Et es QBUS2SU A956GOT AeGT OBUS2SU Unit for extension of distance A9GT QCNB 3 between GOT and base unit 3 Connection cable between base QCO6B 0 6m QC12B 1 2m QC30B 3 0m unit and GOT QC50B 5 0m QC100B 10 0m QCO6B 0 6m QC12B 1 2m QC30B 3 0m QC50B 5 0m QC100B 10 0m A9GT QC150BS 15 0m A9GT QC200BS 20 0m A9GT QC250BS 25 0m A9GT QC300BS 30 0m Connection cable between bus extension connector box and GOT 1 There are the following differences between the bus connection board and bus connection unit A9GT LIBUSS U Has one interface and usable with the GOT at termination Unusable with the GOT at midpoint A9GT LIBUS2S U Has two interfaces and usable with the at termination and the GOT at midpoint 2 A single GOT does not accept multiple bus connection units and bus connection boards 3 For the system configuration using the the same extension number as set to the GOT must be set to the A9GT QCNB Refer to Section 3 3 for the extension number setting 4 The GOT of the following hardware version is
256. remote device station 9 1 CC Link connection via 4 10 1 Computer link connection 5 1 Connection to bar code reader 21 1 Connection to external I O equipment 21 8 Connection to personal computer 21 19 Connection to 21 6 Connection to video camera 21 24 Connection to servo amplifiers 21 26 Direct connection to CPU 4 1 Ethernet 11 1 18 1 Matsushita Electric Works PLC 19 1 MELSECNET connection data link system 6 1 Index 2 MELSECNET connection network 7 1 Microcomputer connection 20 1 Omron PLC connection 12 1 Sharp PLC connection 15 1 SIEMENS PLC connection 17 1 Toshiba PLC connection 16 1 Yaskawa PLC connection 13 1 What is connection with servo amplifiers 1 6 What is PC card installation 1 5 Index 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Ter
257. rther details refer to the instruction manual of the memo bus unit 13 YASKAWA PLC CONNECTION 13 3 2 RS 232C cable 1 Connection diagram MELSEC GOT a When using GL60S GL60H GL70H GL120 GL130 MP 920 MP 930 CP 9200 H or PROGIC 8 when using D sub 9 pin port Yaskawa PLC D sub 9 pin male metric screw type Cable connection and direction of signal GOT D sub 9 pin female inch screw type Yaskawa PLC D sub 25 pin male metric screw type D sub 9 pin female inch screw type _ RD 077 Yaskawa PLC D sub 9 pin male metric screw type Cable connection and direction of signal 8 SD TXD DTR ER e p memes 8 CS CTS GOT D sub 9 pin female inch screw type 13 9 13 9 13 YASKAWA PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT d When using PROGIC 8 when using D sub 15 pin port Yaskawa PLC side GOT D sub 15 pin male D sub 9 pin female Cable connection and signal direction metric screw type inch screw type Pore 2 2 RD RXD RXD 3 3 SD TXD RTS 4 4 DTR ER m e REESE NS eec ee 6 DSR DR GND 7 i 7 5 5 EST 8 cscts _ 2 L PLC GOT 14 pins m D sub 9 pin female Cable connection and signal direction inch screw type Clamped to the hood 2 Connector and connector cover Connector for GOT HDEB 9S
258. s Command to register the GOT internal device number that performs the always remote register read command Monitor register Maximum registration points Section 9 2 5 6 When the number of stations is set to 4 stations 14 points When the number of stations is set to 2 stations 6 points Command to always read the GOT internal device data Monitor request stored by executing the monitor register command to the Section 9 2 5 7 remote register Command to always register the GOT internal device number of the GOT internal device that performs the always remote register data write command Always write register Section 9 2 5 8 Maximum registration points When the number of stations is set to 4 stations 14 points When the number of stations is set to 2 stations 6 points Command to always write remote register data to the GOT Always write request internal device registered by executing the always write Section 9 2 5 9 register command 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 9 2 5 Details of Each Command The execution method for each command is described The following system example is used to describe the sequence program in this section Refer to the CC Link Master Module User s Manual regarding the sequence program for the entire CC Link system GOT Station No Number of 1 station stations occupied 2 station setting Relationship among the PLC CPU master station buff
259. s FX2 series FX2C series FX2N series FX2NC series CPU unit Motion controller CPU Series Generic term of Q172CPU Q173CPU Motion controller CPU A Series A273UHCPU A273UHCPU S3 A171SCPU S3 A171SHCPU Motion controller CPU Generic term of Motion controller CPU Q Series Motion controller CPU A Series Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU CPU units QCPU A Mode Generic term of QO2CPU A Q02HCPU A and QO6HCPU A CPU units Generic term of QCPU Q Mode and QCPU A Mode QnACPU Small Type QnACPU AnUCPU AnACPU AnNCPU ACPU Large Type CPU A2US H CPU AnS H CPU A1SJ H CPU FA controller Peripheral connection G4 unit E71 series compatible E71 Omron PLC Yaskawa PLC SLC500 Series MicroLogix1000 Series MicroLogix1500 Series Allen Bradley PLC Sharp PLC Other PLC PROSEC T Series PROSEC V Series Toshiba PLC SIEMENS PLC Large type H series H200 to 252 Series H Series board type EH 150 Series HITACHI PLC HIDIC H Series Matsushita Electric Works PLC Memory S Others Object Personal Computer Servo amplifier Generic term of LM610 LM7600 LM8000 CPU unit Abbreviation of AJ65BT G4 S3 Generic term of AJ71E71 S3 A1SJ71E71 B2 S3 A1SJ71E71 B5 S3 AJ71E71N B2 AJ71E71N B5T A1SJ71E71N B2 and ATSJ71E71N B5T Generic term of AJ71QE71 ATSJ71QE71 B2 AJ71QE71 B5 ATSJ71QE71 B5 AJ71QE71N B2 AJ71QE71N B5T A1SJ71QE71N B2 and A1SJ71QE71N B5T Generic term of C200HS C200H C200
260. s If other devices on the data link system are monitored display speed will be significantly reduced Therefore monitor link relay B and link register W that are allocated by the link parameter 4 Setting method of monitor device Describes the NW numbers for setting monitor devices and method of setting station numbers with an example shown below For monitoring devices B a When monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the connected station by the link parameter local station and link parameter make sure to use the local device number if NW number 0 Station number Local designating devices Unk allocated to other station b When monitoring devices of other stations If not display speed will NW number 0 Station number Refer to the following table Station number setting Stata Station to 12 connected to 8056599 11 L3 1 2 3 GOT m E eua Other 3 ai ooo Other 0 Local a decime 2 Other 0 Local meon loner ee 2 SPECIFICATION MELSEC GOT 2 3 2 Network system MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 access range for monitoring 1 Bus connection a If connected to multi PLC system 1 The control station on the network and all normal stations can be monitored 2 The control station on the other network and all normal stations can be monitored To monitor the other network be sur
261. s Detailed Information Module Module Name GOTs00 Product information 010910000000000 1 0 Address 0 Implementation Position Main Base Slot Madule Information Unit access Possible 120 Clear Hold Settings Status of External Power Supply Noise Filter Setting Fuse Status Input Type Status of 1 0 Address Verify Agreement Present Error No Error format HEX Error History C DEC No error is The display sequence turn of the error history is displayed from always shown an old error The error of the latest is displayed in the line in the under Not shown Close Hence confirm the module information of the GOT using the GOT side function e g utility function system alarm function 3 19 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 3 3 2 Connection with other than QCPU Q mode For bus connection with any CPU other than the QCPU the GOT must be assigned to an empty I O slot on the extension base unit To make assignment setting use the bus connection board unit installed on the GOT or the STAGE No switch or I O slot switch of the A951GOT Bus connection board Extension number switch slot switch Extension number switch Set the extension number of the empty slot to which the will be assigned 1to7 Setthe extension number 0 8 9 Must not be used Factory set to 0 slot switch Set the empty I O slot number to which the GOT will be assigned
262. se the A985GOT TBA V of hardware version L January 2002 or later When the A9GT 80V4R1 is used depending on the video camera type noise entering from the power supply cable of the camera may cause the PLC and or GOT to malfunction Supply power to the camera from the power supply that differs from the one for the PLC or GOT Do not supply power from the same receptacle If power cannot be supplied from a different power supply install the following line filter to the power supply line of the camera Recommended line filter TDK make ZHC2203 11 or equivalent Using the video camera via some vision sensor type requires a power supply unit Some video camera or system allows video signals to be output from both the power supply unit and video camera If video signals are output from both the video camera and power supply unit the voltage levels of the signals may become low and pictures may not be displayed properly In such a case signals should be output from the video camera only In any environment where noise may cause a malfunction we recommend you to ground the camera system and GOT separately 21 16 21 16 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 21 5 2 Coaxial cable The following are the specifications connectors and fabricating method of the coaxial cable used to connect the GOT video camera and vision sensor 1 Coaxial cable used As the coaxial cable use 3C 2V or 5C 2V C 3501 conformance
263. station of the CC Link system and allows remote control via network Via the G4 the GOT can also be integrated into the CC Link system When the GOT is connected via the G4 only the QCPU Q mode may be monitored Partner manufacturer s product E Master station 7 89 Intelligent device S station G4 pz ed Intelligent device station Remote device station gt MELSEC GOT 6 Ethernet connection refer to Chapter 11 By incorporating the GOT into the Ethernet system UDP IP communication protocol the PLC CPU can be remote controlled via the network u 7 Third party PLC connection refer to Chapters 12 to 19 The GOT can be connected with any of the following third party PLC CPUs for monitoring OMRON PLC Yaskawa PLC Allen Bradley PLC Sharp PLC Toshiba PLC SIEMENS PLC Hitachi PLC Matsushita Electric Works PLC lt o inl ee 11 o 8 Microcomputer connection Refer to Chapter 16 Virtual device D of the GOT can be monitored by sending receiving data from to a personal computer microcomputer board PLC etc hereinafter referred to as host Device data area DO Memory Write read command 0100 000A 0163 0362 X z S 1 0100 000A X 0163 0362 00 02047 204 Interruption outpu
264. system configuration and connection conditions assume CC Link connection remote device station with the PLC CPU The numbers 4 to 3 given in the system configuration denote the numbers 1 to 3 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance a 2 CC Link system master local unit 32GOTs Within 1200m 10 e 3 CC Link dedicated cable Longest TU 5 s Max 1200m 1 The number of connected GOTs varies with the configuration of the CC Link system and the installation distance maximum transmission distance varies with the transmission speed of the CC Link system For details refer to the CC Link System Master Local Unit User s Manual Details 2 On the CC Link system the GOT is handled as a slave station as described below Description CC Link station type Remote device station Number of occupied stations 2 stations 4 stations selectable 8 A termination resistor is needed to install the GOT at the end of the CC Link system 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the PLC CPU ST Type Image No Application GOT unit CC Link communication unit _ CC Link connected remote A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A8GT J61BT15 device station GOT A956WGOT A956GOT
265. t gt Microcomputer board 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT 9 Optional devices connection Refer to Chapter 21 a Bar code reader If connected to a bar code reader the GOT can write data read with the bar code reader to the PLC CPU Bar code Device No PLC CPU 123456789 GOT 0 Number of bytes 9 1 Data 21 3231H peace 2 Data 43 3433H L 3 Data 65 3635H 4 Data 87 3837H 5 Data 9 2039H b Printer If connected to a printer the GOT can print data of alarm history and hard copy functions c External I O equipment By connection of input equipment operation panel ten key panel pushbuttons etc you can write to devices e g touch input numerical input and screen switching from outside the GOT In addition you can connect output equipment lamps relays etc to provide outputs from the GOT to the outside External input equipment 0000 50000 0000 Operation panel pushbuttons etc External unit 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT d PC card Installation of PC card on the GOT allows storage of data used in the transfer data system program monitor screen data and object function alarm history function re
266. t Use a connector matching the host 20 4 20 4 20 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 2 For RS 232C communication a Connection diagram Host 1 GOT D sub 9 pin female Cable connection and signal direction inch screw type 1 Pin numbers at the host side only for reference They are not defined Use the appropriate number according to the host specification b Connector and connector cover Connector for GOT HDEB 9S 05 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD HDE CTH1 4 40 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO LTD Connector for host Use a connector matching the host 20 3 Transmission specification Transmission specification for communication between the GOT and the host is as follows Setting details Data bit Parity bit Yes even number Sumchek es O 4800 9600 19200bps p default 19200bps 20 5 20 5 20 0 CROCOMPUTER CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 20 4 Device data area The data area virtual device of the GOT is shown below Address decimal Details 1 DO to D2 Communication error status Error varies depending on the error status of the GOT communication driver Not used SIO framing error SIO parity error SIO overrun error Communication time error Cable removal error Not used Clock data year Clock data year month day hour minute is stored in BCD 2 15108 digits to each address 0 to 7 bi Store last 2 digit data of the
267. t connection 11 2 1 When using E71 For communication from GOT via the E71 there are the following setting items and precautions The explanations in this section will be made for the following system configuration lt GOT gt N W 1 PC No 59 IP address 192 168 0 3 Port 5001 11 IP address 192 168 0 1 Port 5001 Set as host Refer to item 5 in this section for how to set up the Ethernet unit network number of GOT personal computer number IP address and port number When connecting multiple GOTs in the Ethernet network set different PLC No for each GOT Refer to Section 11 2 6 Procedure for communications via E71 Restrictions Communications cannot be made via the MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET B MELSECNET I 1 Compatible models AJ71E71 S3 A1SJ71E71 B2 S3 A1SJ71E71 B5 S3 AJ71E71N B2 AJ71E71N B5T A1SJ71E71N B2 A1SJ71E71N B5T 2 E71 switch settings AJ71E71 S3 AJ71E71N B2 AJ71E71N B5T A1SJ71E71N B2 A1SJ71E71N B5T 15 71 71 2 53 A1SJ71E71 B5 S3 Operation mode setting switch 0 online mode 0 online mode Communications a SW2 OFF BIN code SW2 OFF BIN code condition setting switch CPU communications timing setting switch SW7 ON online program correction enabled SW3 ON online program correction enabled 11 3 11 3 11 ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 3 Sequence programs Initial pro
268. t storing write A Write data1 Operating Information data command and expand write data and write to the GOT internarl device 1 Using the sequence program store the write command and the write data to be stored in the GOT internal de vice to the remote register RWw of the GOT allo cated to the master station 2 When the GOT request flag is turned on the write com mand data and write data are stored in the GOT remote registers and the write data is stored in the GOT internal device 3 The data in the GOT internal device where the write data is stored is monitored Operating Repeat steps 1 and 2 to execute the write command 00O0000000 and write several information to the GOT internal de vice and monitor the data 3 Monitor production amount Line Rate 190 500 30 200 400 50 450 700 75 550 600 85 X JOL J010 JOL X JEE The openrating information and production amount are monitored with GOT Monitor GD 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT When the GOT internal device read command is executed PLC CPU GOT Repeat storing the read command data and read from GOT internal device data RWw GOT internal device Read command station Read data1 Operating command data Read command Re
269. ta in the GOT remote register RWw Command execution The GOT complete flag turns on when the command processing is complete 3 By link scan the read data is stored in the master station s remote register RWr 4 Read the data to the PLC CPU using the FROM instruction etc 9 16 9 16 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT d Sequence program example Always ON FROM HO 4 48 KI Remote input RX read Initial setting execution program Refer to 1 B Elie ovis a Ne E status flag Command M58 c k H ov 0100 Command data storage MOV D101 Transfers master station RWwo 1 To HiEO 0100 GOT request flag ON command execution SET 14s GOT complete flag M48 ON at processing complete RST M148 Reads to PLC CPU FROM HO H2E0 0200 Always ON TO H163 K4M148 Remote output RY write 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 3 Random read command a Random read command This is a command to read data from several different GOT internal devices to the remote register b Command format Transfer Direction Write data RWwm Higher byte 3 Random read setting When the occupied points are 2 stations 1 to 6 GOT internal device point to be read When the occupied points are 4 stations 1 to 14 GOT internal device point to be read 0 to 1023 GOT
270. tch for RS 232C RS 422 For RS 422 communication set this switch to RS 422 down For RS 232C communication set this switch to RS 232C up 2 Dip switches Set the switches as follows MN 5 NNI ON Be sure to the switches shadec with DIP switch setting inside battery storage part ON Set DIP switches to OFF mor o A 2 21 DIP switch setting inside battery storage part ON O Set all DIP switches to OFF 12 13 12 OMRON PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 2 Setting by peripheral tool Use a peripheral tool to set the CPU CV500 VC1000 CV2000 CVM1 CPU01 CVM1 CPU11 CVM1 CPU21 CS1 CJ1 as follows Stop bit 2 stop bit 7 bit Machine No Machine No 00 12 14 12 14 12 OMRON PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 12 2 3 Initializing C200Ha series and CQM1 Before using the RS232C port C200Ha series and CQM1 write values to the devices as follows and initialize the port by using a peripheral tool or the DM monitor For further details refer to the instruction manual of C200Ha series and CQM1 DM6645 0001H DM6648 0000H DM6646 0304 DM6649 0000H DM6647 00004 eel 12 2 4 Initializing communication board Before using the communication board write values to the devices as follows and initialize each port of the communication board For appl
271. ted distance Connected to TOOL port 3 RS 232C cable Within 3m Max 3m onnected to COM port 4 RS 232C cable Max 15m Within 15m RS 232C cable Max 15m 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the FP2 Applicati ication E i Lid Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T Matsushita Electric Works A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 PLC connected GOT hewor A953GOT with built in communication interface RS 232C cable between TOOL 3 AFC8503 3 port of PLC CPU and GOT E RS 232C cable between COM rt of PLC CPU and GOT 1 Jand GOTT FC85853 3m RS 232C cable between link interface unit and GOT 1 1 The RS 232C cable can be user fabricated Refer to Section 19 3 for details of the fabricating method User fabricated cable 2 19 3 19 3 19 MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC WORKS PLC MELSEC GOT 19 1 4 Connection with FP3 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the FP3 The numbers 1 to 6 given in the system configuration denote the numbers 1 to 6 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers
272. tem configuration having remote stations special function modules cannot be monitored When using CC Link connection remote device station The special function modules cannot be monitored When using CC Link connection intelligent device station CC Link connection via G4 The special function modules on the bases of the master and local stations can be monitored In a system configuration having remote stations special function modules cannot be monitored When using Ethernet connection The special function unit on the base of the PLC CPU assigned the IP address can be monitored The special function modules on the bases of the master and local stations can be monitored The station assigned in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer can be monitored 2 SPECIFICATION MELSEC GOT 2 3 Access range for monitoring It should be noted that you cannot connect the GOT to monitor a remote I O station in a network system or data link system 2 3 1 Data link system MELSECNET B II access range for monitoring 1 Bus connection CPU direct connection Computer link connection a connected to master station Local stations can be monitored If the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored b If connected to local station The master station can be monitored If the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACP
273. ters RWr D200 to D203 2 0 to 2 to to RWr3 Remote registers RWr RWr0 to RWr0 to RWr3 D100 to D103 to 1E3H RWwO to m RWwO0 to RWw3 8 CC LINK CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 8 3 3 Monitor screen examples The following are the monitor screen examples of the GOT Refer to the help function of GT Designer for the way to set each object 1 Common setting PLC Type GOT Type Base Screen Switching Device MELSEC QnA Q A97 GOT GT SoftGOT D300 2 Base screen No 1 settings MAIN MANU OF BLOCK A LINE CONDITIONS 1 PRODUCTION CONDITIONS 2 OTHER BLOCK CONDITIONS 3 No Object Function to Be Set Setting Operation 1 Touch key function Base screen switching fixed value 2 Setting made to switch to base screen No 2 2 Touch key function Base screen switching fixed value 3 Setting made to switch to base screen No 3 Touch key function Base screen switching fixed value 4 Setting made to switch to base screen No 4 3 Base screen No 2 settings The devices of the master station assigned to the AJ65BTB1 16DT remote I O station are monitored Monitor using cyclic transmission LINE CONDITIONS OF BLOCK A LINE 1 LINE2 LINE3 OPERATING CONDITON 1 2 3 TROUBLE OCCURRENCE 4 5 PRODUCTION OTHER MAIN CONDITIONS B
274. th the switch use it in the refresh method The following examples indicate how to use the inputs X of the empty slots Inputs X are assigned in a MELSECNET II B data link or MELSECNET 10 network The receive data of a MELSECNET MINI S3 data link is read to inputs X under the FROM instruction The inputs X of the empty slots are switched on off from a computer link unit The inputs X of the empty slots are switched on off with the touch switch function bit SET RST alternate momentary of the GOT 3 1 5 Precautions for use of ATSJCPU and A1SJHCPU Note that the GOT cannot be used when an extension base unit is connected to the A1SJCPU or A1SJHCPU 3 1 6 Precautions for GOT connection in duplex system Note the following when bus connecting the GOT to the duplex system of the Q4ARCPU When connecting the GOT to a duplex system connect the GOT to the duplex extension base A68RB in the last stage of the duplex system Also use the duplex extension base of version B or later For the way of confirming the version of the duplex extension base refer to the DATE column of the rating plate applied to the portion show below Expanded view of rating plate MITSUBISHI PROGRAMABLE CONTOROLLER Version of duplex extension base The GOT will not operate properly in the following system configurations The GOT is bus connected to the duplex main base A32RB A33RB The GOT is bus
275. the transmission speed to the GOT according to the setting of the OMRON PLC used Set the transmission speed on Setup of the GOT s utility function For details of the utility function refer to the GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Works2 Version1 GT Designer2 Versioni Compatible Extended Option Function Manual ERR OUTSIDE SPEAKER OFF ON SCREEN SAVE TIME 0 MIN 0 FREE SCREEN SAVE LIGHT ON LANGUAGE AAs Baud rate 19200 T CHANGE lt Baud rate Choose the GOT side transmission speed Factory set to 19200bps Page 1 2 T lt SELECT CHANGE The utility function can be started by switching power on again after installing the system programs system OS communication driver etc into the GOT After the utility function has started touch the Setup icon to display the setup screen and make settings related to OMRON PLC connection 12 16 12 16 12 OMRON PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 12 3 Connection cable 12 3 1 RS 422 cable The connection diagram and connectors for the RS 422 cables between the upper link unit the communication board unit the CPU and the GOT are as follows 1 Connection diagram 1 Upper link unit C200H LK202 V1 2 Communication board C200HW COM03 C200HW COMO06 CS1W SCB41 Communication unit CS1W SCU41 Omron GOT D sub 9 pin male D sub 25 pin male metric screw type Cable connection and direction of signal metric screw type Sigal n
276. tions 4 1 1 Connection with 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume CPU direct connection with the QCPU The numbers 1 to 5 given the system configurations denote the numbers to 5 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance al Within 3m Wl 4 RS 422 cable Within 30 5m Max 30 5m 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the QCPU Image No Application a GOT unit Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS4 CPU direct connected RS 422 A956WGOT A9GT 50WRSA4 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT 9 52 A9GT RS2T CPU direct connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 232C communication GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface RS 422 conversion cable between QCPU RS 422 FA CNV2402CBL 0 2m FA CNV2405CBL 0 5m cable RS 422 cable between RS 422 conversion cable and GOT AC30R4 25P 3 0m AC100R4 25P 10 0m AC300R4 25P 30 0m RS 232C cable between QCPU and GOT QC30R2 3 0m 4 CPU
277. to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance e E 3 RS 232C cable Changes with P 1GOT the host side specifications b 4 RS 422 cable 20 1 20 1 20 20 20 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for microcomputer connection Type Applicati Serial communication board A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T Microcomputer connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 232C communication GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface SE A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS4 EO Microcomputer connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRSA4 E D 3 422 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface RS 232C cable between host and GOT Refer to Section 20 2 and fabricate on user side RS 422 cable between host and GOT 1 Using the A9GT RS2T which contains a clock component allows use of the function which can display the GOT time of day 20 2 Connecting cable 20 2 1 With connection to DTR The cable connection diagram and the connector with connection to DTR signals are described below 1 When using RS 422 communication a Connection diagram Host GOT D sub 25 pin male Cable connection and direction of signal metric screw type DSR signal
278. tor crimp terminal and cable ES Connector with cover 17JE 23250 02 D8A6 DK Round type crimp terminal P V1 25 M4 Nippon Crimping Terminal recommended part 20 core shield cable 3 SRF PVV 1SB 24x20 Toyokuni Power Cables recommended part 3 Precautions for cable preparation The cable must be 200m 655 74 feet or shorter 18 5 18 5 18 HITACHI PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 18 3 2 RS 232C cable The connection diagram and connectors for the RS 422 cables between the HITACHI PLC the Link interface unit and the GOT are as follows In the following cases note that the connection diagram of the cable used changes with the set transmission speed POINT When using the H 4010 CPU3 40H or H 252C CPU22 02HC CPE22 02HC 4800bps Use the connection diagram in a 19200bps Use the connection diagram in b Other than above Either of the connection diagrams in a and b may be used When connecting the cable to the serial port 2 of the EH CPU104 EH CPU208 EH CPU308 or EH CPU316 19200bps 38400bps Use the connection diagram in b Other than above Either of the connection diagrams in a and b may be used When setting No 3 and No 4 of the DIP switch 1 to OFF using the CPU software revision version J or later of the H 4010 38400bps Use the connection diagram in b Other than above Either of the connection diagrams in a and b may be used 1 Connection diagram a
279. transmission speed between GOT and Allen Bradley PLC Factory set to 19200bps ADAPTER ADDRESS Specify the address on DH485 NETWORK assigned to the Adapter connected to the GOT Set the same address as the DH 485 node address specified for the adaptor Set the DH 485 node address carefully so that it does not overlap the node address of the PLC on the DH 485 network Setting is needed only when multiple CPUs are connected Factory set to 0 HOST FF ADDRESS Specify the address on DH485 NETWORK assigned to the PLC CPU to which the Adapter is connected The specified PLC CPU is the host when monitor device setting is made on the GT Designer For details of monitor device setting refer to the help function of GT Designer Factory set to 1 For details of the utility function refer to the GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 Compatible Extended Option Function Manual Ub i Baud rate OUTSIDE SPEAKER OFF ON Set the transmission speed between SCREEN SAVE TIME Q MIN GOT and Allen Bradley PLC SCREEN SAVE LIGHT Mai Factory set to 19200bps LANGUAGE EE ADAPTER ADDRESS Baud rate 19200 T CHANG Specify the address on DH485 NETWORK ADAPTER ADDRESS 00 07 31 assigned to the adapter connected HOST FF ADDRESS al 57310 Page 1 2 T lt SELECT CHANGE The utility function can be started by switching power on again after installing the to the
280. tt value is entered Always ON TO H163 K4M148 Remote output RY write 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT 8 Always write register command a Always write register command This is a command to always register the device number of the GOT internal device that performs the remote register data write After executing the always write register command always execute the always write request command b Command format Transfer Direction Write data RWwm Higher byte 8 Always write register setting When the occupied points are 2 stations 1 to 6 Points to be written to the GOT internal device When the occupied points are 4 stations Master station 1 to 14 Points to be written to the GOT internal device 0 to 1023 GOT internal device numbers to be RWwm 1 to RWwn E regis tered Storage for the setting mentioned above Master station RWmtoRWm F Communication overview Refer to 9 RWwm Lower byte 9 Always write request command a Always write request command This is a command to always write data in the remote register to the GOT internal device registered by executing the always write register command Execute the always write request command after executing the always write register command b Command format Transfer Direction Write data Store write data for the number of points registered
281. types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected 1 distance 2 Data link unit 3 Data link cable ger 5 10km 64 5 Within 10km max 3 Data link cable Max 10km 1 The number of GOTs connectable is up to the number of connectable stations in the corresponding data link system 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the PLC CPU No Appl catio unit Data link unit E Image MELSECNET connected data A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT 7 71 23 A7GT J71AR23 link system GOT 1 A956WGOT A956GOT A7GT J71AT23B Data link unit AJ71AR21 AJ71AT21B A1SJ71AR21 A1SJ71AT21B Data link cable 2 Fiber optic cable coaxial cable twisted pair cable 1 The number of GOTs connectable is up to the number of connectable stations in the corresponding data link system 2 For details of the data link cables fiber optic cable coaxial cable twisted pair cable refer to the MELSECNET MELSECNET B Data Link System Reference Manual 6 MELSECNET CONNECTION DATA LINK SYSTEM MELSEC GOT 6 2 Switch setting of data link unit Describes about switch setting for using the data link unit 1 Station number switch Since the data link unit is for local stations only set the switch as follows MNET II Stations 1 to 64 0 master station
282. uch key function into the specified Touch key function Bit alternate GD255 b2 bits bO to b2 of GD255 Touch key function Base screen switching fixed value 3 Setting made to switch to base screen No 3 Touch key function Base screen switching fixed value 1 Setting made to switch to base screen No 1 d Base screen No 3 settings Production situation screen Parts A Parts B Line1 1 2 Line2 3 4 Line3 5 6 Operating Main command Screen 7 8 Settings made to display the values stored in Monitor device GD104 GD101 GD106 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT e Sequence program example Refer to the Master Module User s Manual about the program for setting CC Link parameter SM400 E 0 FROM HOES Kamas j Remote input RX read PLS j Execute only during power T ux supply is ON 8 ME H101 0100 3 Initial command data storage ro HIEO D100 j Transfers master station y TS Initial processing request flag ON RST M504 2 M57 20 RST M157 SET M300 4 For executing next step ag MEO Mos MAS MOVP H206 D100 J ME A L Continuous read command M306 TEN Dii data storage ro 0
283. ume the use of a large CPU but the same method applies to the use of a small CPU Setting examples 1 Connection of one GOT 2 Connection of two GOTs 3 Connection of three GOTs C oC P P U U Extension No switch 1 slot switch 2 to 7 GOT Extension No switch 1 eot slot switch 2 to 7 GOT Extension No switch 1 slot switch 2 to 7 Extension No switch 1 slot switch 2 to 7 GOT When using a small CPU connect the bus connection cable to the empty extension connector on the main base Extension No switch 1 slot switch 2 to 7 GOT Set switches so that I O slot Switches do not overlap Extension No switch 1 slot switch 2 to 7 Set switches so that I O slot Switches do not overlap 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 3 Setting method used when there are no empty slots on the extension base unit connected When there are no empty I O slots on the base unit set the extension number switch es and I O slot switch es as indicated below Note that the following setting examples assume the use of a large CPU but the same method applies to the use of a small CPU Setting examples
284. unction Write device Wr5 to D205 with the numerical input function into D204 Numerical input function Write device Wr6 to D206 D206 Numerical display function Write device Ww4 from 104 Settings made to display the values stored in Numerical display function Write device Ww5 from 105 D104 D106 6 Numerical display function Write device Ww6 from 106 i Settings made to display on the GOT the Lamp display function Monitor device Y20 RY20 from M144 Fie occurrence nformation stored Setting made to store the ON OFF information Touch key functi Bit ALT X20 RX20 to M32 o Np entered with the touch key function into M32 9 Touch key function Screen switching device Fixed at 1 Setting made to switch to base screen No 1 10 Touch key function Screen switching device Fixed at 2 Setting made to switch to base screen No 2 11 Touch key function Screen switching device Fixed at 4 Setting made to switch to base screen 4 5 Base screen No 4 settings The PLC CPU devices of the master station are directly specified and monitored Monitor using Transient transmission PRODUCTION CONDITIONS OF OTHER BLOCKS BLOCK B BLOCK C OPERATING CONDITION QO 1 Ole PROCUCED QUANTITY 3 4 PRODUCTION INCREASE 5 6 REQUEST LINE PRODUCTION MAIN CONDITION CONDITION 7 8 9
285. unt type upper link unit 5 422 cable Within 200m Max 200m 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the C1000H or C2000H Type Image Application 308 GOT unit Serial communication board meee LN A97 GOT A960GOT RS2 A9GT RS2T Omron PLC connected RS lAagsewGOT IASGT SOWRS2 50WRS2 232C communication GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS4 Omron PLC connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS4 422 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface RS 232C cable between upper link unit and GOT Refer to Section 12 3 and fabricate on user side RS 422 cable between upper link unit and GOT 12 6 12 6 12 OMRON PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 12 1 6 Connection with CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 CPU01 CVM1 CPU11 or CVM1 CPU21 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 CPU01 CVM1 CPU11 or CVM1 CPU21 The numbers 1 to 4 given in the system configurations denote the numbers 4 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of System Configuration connected 3 RS 232C cable
286. urn on the GOT request flag and store the command data in the GOT remote register RWw Command execution The GOT complete flag turns on when the command processing is complete 3 By turning on the GOT monitor request flag always read the data in the GD100 200 and 300 to the remote register RWr 4 By link scan the read data is stored in the master station s remote register RWr 5 Read the data to the PLC CPU using the FROM instruction etc 9 CC LINK CONNECTION REMOTE DEVICE STATION MELSEC GOT d Sequence program example Always ON FROM Ho 4 48 Remote input RX read ag Ae Be D wa eg Sad nh Al tt Sard wd Se ace a ace et Initial setting execution program Refer to 1 MAC fea Yee status flag Command M58 ME MOV 0100 c Ho064 D101 Command data storage Hoocs D102 MOV H012C D103 H1E0 D100 Transfers master station RWw0 to 3 GOT request flag ON SET Kuba command execution GOT complete flag M48 ON processing complete RST 148 Always read command T i fl N M149 GOT monitor request ag O Always read execution FROM H2E0 D200 K3 Reads PLC CPU Link scan is performed after Other command execution program the GOT monitor request flag is tumed then the GD iM a ex t trt tad Lr tea sod tee art prd e
287. us connection Control station Control station Monitor access range of other station devices other than B and W other network 5 Station to be Network No 1 Network No 2 Station accessed connected to GOT AnU 1 1 QnA 1 2 E 1 3 AnU 4 AnU 2 2 2 3 Anu 4 AnU 1 1 O Local x x QnA 12 Exo ou Ter AA 3 x f oloa x x x x x ORAE E O Accessible X Not accessible 2 8 2 8 2 SPECIFICATION MELSEC GOT POINT For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter make sure to use the local device number if designating devices allocated to other station If not display speed will be reduced Designating NW number and station number for setting monitor device 1 Monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter at the connected station local station NW number 0 Station number Local 2 When monitoring other stations other than B and W other network Station to be Network No 1 Network No 2 accessed AaB AnU 1 1 AnA 1 3 1 4 QnA 2 1 2 2 AnN 2 3 2 4 AnU 1 1 1 Other 3 1 Other 2 0ther 2 2 other 1 Other 1 O Local 1 Other 4 2 Other 1 2 Other 2 2 Other 4 0 Other 0 Ota
288. vice D21 batch write packet 2 display of base screen 1 When reply to write to Device D21 current value Numerical displa device D21 is received Ad acquisition request is given batch read packet 3 from GOT 3 3 Numerical display of base Next device value D21 is screen 11 incremented created As long as base screen 1 is When reply to read of Sumcheck calculation of displayed host side repeats device D21 is received send packet is made processing given on left BS eos Device D21 updat t Numerical displ update umerical displa Repyintertupt receipt is giv 2 batch write iam from GOT 50088 When interrupt of switching request from Base screen status is set to Interrupt receipt base screen 1 to base base screen 2 packet 6 screen 2 is received Touch touch key 1 to switch to base screen 2 Host is notified by interrupt When interrupt of switching request from Base screen status is set to Interrupt receipt base screen 2 to base base screen 1 packet 6 Screen 1 is received Touch touch key 3 to switch to base screen 1 Host is notified by interrupt Termination processing Only when error reply is Port close processing is performed received App 3 App 3 APPENDICES MELSEC GOT 1 Send packet structure of screen 1switching batch write packet is indicated Contents wo 020 tpoint
289. when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance Connected to TOOL port 4 FP peripheral 2 Adaptor B RS 232C Within 15 5m 2 3 connection cable at ID cable 7 Max 15 5m 1 GOT E 6 RS 232C cable Max 15m 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the FP3 Type Application PP GOT unit Serial communication board V A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT RS2 A9GT RS2T Matsushita Electric Works A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS2 PLC connected GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface FP peripheral connection cable between TOOL port of PLC AFP5520 0 5m CPU and adaptor RS 232C cable bet Refer to Section 19 3 and fabricate on the user side User fabricated cable 1 adaptor and GOT RS 232C cable between link AFC85853 3m interface unit and GOT 1 The RS 232C cable can be user fabricated Refer to Section 19 3 for details of the fabricating method User fabricated cable 2 19 4 19 4 19 MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC WORKS PLC MELSEC GOT 19 1 5 Connection with FP5 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the FP5 The numbers 1 to 6 given in the system configuration denote the numbers 1 to 6 in
290. with the connection target CPU y 4 Memo bus unit specifications 8 RS 422 cable 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the GL60S GL60H or GL70H Applicati Type mage ication 9 GOT unit Serial communication board Yaskawa PLC connected RS ABBSWGOT A9GT 50WRS2 232C communication GOT A953GOT with built in communication interface Yaskawa PLC connected RS A956WGOT A9GT 50WRS4 422 communication GOT A950GOT with built in communication interface S Memobusunt pamso Feor1 B Memo busunt_ pamso F612 RS 232C cable between memo bus unit and GOT Refer to Section 13 3 and fabricate on user side RS 422 cable between memo bus unit and GOT 13 51 13 1 13 YASKAWA PLC CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 13 1 2 Connection with GL120 or GL130 1 System configurations and connection conditions The following system configurations and connection conditions assume connection with the GL120 or GL130 The numbers 1 to 6 given in the system configurations denote the numbers to 5 in 2 System equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions _ Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance 1 3 3 Memo bus unit 5 RS 232C cable Changes with the connection target CPU y 4 bus unit Sp
291. within the maximum I O points of the PLC CPU excluding those of the main base Cannot be assigned to the main base When the is connected to other than the QCPU mode the I O signals assigned to the PLC CPU should not be used in sequence programs etc as they are used by the GOT system If you use them we cannot guarantee the GOT functions 3 1 2 Restriction on the number of GOTs by the PLC CPU connected to In bus connection note that the number of GOTs connected is restricted by the PLC CPU connected to and the number of special function modules loaded CPU Connected To Number of Connectable GOTs Total Number of GOTS Special Function Modules 1 Connectable QCPU Q mode Motion controller CPU Q Series O oo AINCPUANSTHICPU ATSIIH OPU mecu f Motion A273U H CPU A273UHCPU S3 Max 3 6 in all controller A373UCPU S3 A173UHCPU GPU A171SCPU S3 A171SHCPU A172SHCPU Max 2 2 in all A Series 1 Indicates the following types of special function modules AD51 S3 AD51H S3 AD51FD S3 AD57G S3 71 21 51 AJ71022 S1 AJ71C23 AJ71C24 S3 S6 S8 AJ71E71 S3 AJ71UC24 A1SJ71C24 R2 PRF R4 A1SJ71UC24 R2 PRF R4 A1SJ71E71 B2 B5 S3 ATSD51S 2 It should be only A1SD518 that the special function modules cannot be connected to the QCPU mode 3 1 3 1 3 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 3 1 3 Power supply of PLC CPU and GOT Note the followin
292. y or ladder monitor function is executed the transparent function will not stop 13 When using multiple software run on a personal computer the communication using the transparent function is enabled for one software only Do not perform multiple communications using the transparent function at the same time The offline operation is enabled for each software In addition do not perform communication from the GT Designer to the GOT downloading project data etc during communication using the transparent function 14 When connecting to the FXCPU set the transmission speed of the GX Developer to 9600bps Otherwise the transparent function will not operate 4 CPU DIRECT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 4 3 3 Compatible RS 232C cable Use any of the following types of RS 232C cables for connection of the personal computer and GOT e AC30R2 9SS e FX 232CAB 1 e AC30R2 9P 1 F2 232CAB 1 1 9 25 pin converter introduced product 0232 31 of Diatrend make is required The RS 232C cable for connection of the personal computer and GOT may also be fabricated by the user The connection diagrams and connectors for the RS 232C cables are indicated below 1 Connection diagram a Connection diagram of AC30R2 9SS Personal computer NE GOT Side Side Cable connection and direction of signal inNo Signal rise D ems 8 b Connection diagram of AC30R2 9P Personal
293. you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions System Configuration 2 Ten key panel 5 Connection cable p Max 20m gt For input only 6 Connection cable h dj 0900000000 gt General purpose input devices 4 Connector terminal 8 Connection cable e g pushbuttons block conversion NS 7 Connection cable qM 2 c General purpose output devices e g lamps relays 8 Connection cable Max 10m gt le Max 10m panel 4 Connector terminal block conversion unit 7 Connection cable ti Ti General purpose output devices c e g lamps relays Re M 8 Connection cable WE 10 gt 10 4 Connector terminal 9 Connection cable block conversion unit 0000000009 7 Connection cable i General purpose output devices e g lamps relays d ce 8 Connection cable wr f Max 10m Max 10m gt 21 4 21 4 21 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION MELSEC GOT 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection of external I O equipment No Appl catio GO unit Externa O interface unit A985GOT A97 GOT A960GOT A9GT 70KBF External I O equipment connected GOT A956WGOT A9
294. ystem equipment Refer to these numbers when you want to confirm the types and applications Connection Conditions Number of Installation System Configuration connected distance 2 Network unit 2 27 ee Within 30km aT see II Neiwoncesple max Max 30km 1 The number of GOTs connectable is up to the number of connectable stations in the corresponding network system 2 System equipment The following table indicates the system equipment needed for connection with the PLC CPU Type GOT unit Network unit MELSECNET connected A985GOT V A97 GOT A960GOT A7GT J71LP23 A7GT J71BR13 network system GOT 1 A956WGOT A956GOT QJ71BR11 AJ71LP21 A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71BR11 3 Network cable 2 Fiber optic cable coaxial cable twisted pair cable 1 The number of GOTs connectable is up to the number of connectable stations in the corresponding network system 2 For details of the network cables fiber optic cable coaxial cable twisted pair cable refer to the MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual 7 MELSECNET CONNECTION NETWORK SYSTEM MELSEC GOT 7 2 Switch setting of network unit Describes about switch setting for using the data link unit 1 Network No switch Designates the network number connected to the network unit 2 Group No switch Designates the desired group number to incorporate the network unit If no group is designated set this switch to 0 3 Stati

GOT-A900 Series User`s Manual (GT Works

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents